Toshiba TECRA A8-EZ8511X User Guide

Toshiba TECRA A8-EZ8511X User Guide
TOSHIBA
TECRA A8 / Satellite Pro A120
Portable Personal Computer
User’s Manual
Downloaded from LpManual.com Manuals
Copyright
© 2006 by TOSHIBA Corporation. All rights reserved. Under the copyright
laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without the prior
written permission of TOSHIBA. No patent liability is assumed, with respect
to the use of the information contained herein.
TOSHIBA TECRA A8 / Satellite Pro A120 Portable Personal Computer
User’s Manual
First edition May 2006
Copyright authority for music, movies, computer programs, data bases and
other intellectual property covered by copyright laws belongs to the author
or to the copyright owner. Copyrighted material can be reproduced only for
personal use or use within the home. Any other use beyond that stipulated
above (including conversion to digital format, alteration, transfer of copied
material and distribution on a network) without the permission of the
copyright owner is a violation of copyright or author’s rights and is subject
to civil damages or criminal action. Please comply with copyright laws in
making any reproduction from this manual.
Disclaimer
This manual has been validated and reviewed for accuracy. The
instructions and descriptions it contains are accurate for the TOSHIBA
TECRA A8 / Satellite Pro A120 Portable Personal Computer at the time of
this manual’s production. However, succeeding computers and manuals
are subject to change without notice. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for
damages incurred directly or indirectly from errors, omissions or
discrepancies between the computer and the manual.
Trademarks
IBM is a registered trademark and IBM PC is a trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.
Intel, Intel SpeedStep, Intel Core and Centrino are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and
other countries/regions.
Windows and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Photo CD is a trademark of Eastman Kodak.
Sonic RecordNow! is a registered trademark of Sonic Solutions.
Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by TOSHIBA
under license.
i.LINK is trademark and registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
InterVideo and WinDVD are registered trademarks of InterVideo Inc.
WinDVD Creator is trademark of InterVideo Inc.
Other trademarks and registered trademarks not listed above may be used
in this manual.
ii Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
FCC information
Product Name: TECRA A8 / Satellite Pro A120
Model number:
PTA82, PTA83, PSAC0, PSAC1
FCC notice "Declaration of Conformity Information"
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
■ Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
■ Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
■ Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
■ Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Only peripherals complying with the FCC class B limits may be attached to
this equipment. Operation with non-compliant peripherals or peripherals
not recommended by TOSHIBA is likely to result in interference to radio
and TV reception. Shielded cables must be used between the external
devices and the computer’s external monitor port, serial port, USB port,
IEEE1394 port and microphone jack. Changes or modifications made to
this equipment, not expressly approved by TOSHIBA or parties authorized
by TOSHIBA could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC conditions
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Contact
Address:
Telephone:
TOSHIBA America Information Systems, Inc.
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618-1697
(949) 583-3000
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
iii
EU Declaration of Conformity
TOSHIBA declares, that the product: PTA82*/ PTA83*/ PSAC0*/ PSAC1*
conforms to the following Standards:
Supplementary
Information:
“The product complies with the requirements of
the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, the EMC
Directive 89/336/EEC and/or the R&TTE
Directive 1999/05/EEC.”
This product is carrying the CE-Mark in accordance with the related
European Directives. Responsible for CE-Marking is TOSHIBA Europe,
Hammfelddamm 8, 41460 Neuss, Germany.
VCCI Class B Information
Modem warning notice
Conformity Statement
The equipment has been approved to [Commission Decision “CTR21”] for
pan-European single terminal connection to the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN).
However, due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in
different countries/regions the approval does not, of itself, give an
unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network
termination point.
In the event of problems, you should contact your equipment supplier in the
first instance.
ivDownloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Network Compatibility Statement
This product is designed to work with, and is compatible with the following
networks. It has been tested to and found to conform with the additional
requirements conditional in EG 201 121.
Germany
ATAAB AN005,AN006,AN007,AN009,AN010
and DE03,04,05,08,09,12,14,17
Greece
ATAAB AN005,AN006 and GR01,02,03,04
Portugal
ATAAB AN001,005,006,007,011 and
P03,04,08,10
Spain
ATAAB AN005,007,012, and ES01
Switzerland
ATAAB AN002
All other countries/regions ATAAB AN003,004
Specific switch settings or software setup are required for each network,
please refer to the relevant sections of the user guide for more details.
The hookflash (timed break register recall) function is subject to separate
national type approvals. It has not been tested for conformity to national
type regulations, and no guarantee of successful operation of that specific
function on specific national networks can be given.
Japan regulations
Region selection
If you are using the computer in Japan, technical regulations described in
the Telecommunications Business Law require that you select the Japan
region mode. It is illegal to use the modem in Japan with any other
selection.
Redial
Up to two redial attempts can be made. If more than two redial attempts are
made, the modem will return Black Listed. If you are experiencing
problems with the Black Listed code, set the interval between redials at one
minute or longer.
Japan’s Telecommunications Business Law permits up to two redials on
analogue telephones, but the redials must be made within a total of three
minutes.
The internal modem is approved by Japan Approvals Institute for
Telecommunications Equipment.
A04-0609001
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
v
One of the labels is located on the module.
Pursuant to FCC CFR 47, Part 68:
When you are ready to install or use the modem, call your local telephone
company and give them the following information:
■ The telephone number of the line to which you will connect the modem
■ The registration number that is located on the device
The FCC registration number of the modem will be found on either the
device which is to be installed, or, if already installed, on the bottom of the
computer outside of the main system label.
■ The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary.
For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.
The modem connects to the telephone line by means of a standard jack
called the USOC RJ11C.
viDownloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Type of service
Your modem is designed to be used on standard-device telephone lines.
Connection to telephone company-provided coin service (central office
implemented systems) is prohibited. Connection to party lines service is
subject to state tariffs. If you have any questions about your telephone line,
such as how many pieces of equipment you can connect to it, the
telephone company will provide this information upon request.
Telephone company procedures
The goal of the telephone company is to provide you with the best service it
can. In order to do this, it may occasionally be necessary for them to make
changes in their equipment, operations, or procedures. If these changes
might affect your service or the operation of your equipment, the telephone
company will give you notice in writing to allow you to make any changes
necessary to maintain uninterrupted service.
If problems arise
If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should
immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may cause harm to
the telephone network. If the telephone company notes a problem, they
may temporarily discontinue service. When practical, they will notify you in
advance of this disconnection. If advance notice is not feasible, you will be
notified as soon as possible. When you are notified, you will be given the
opportunity to correct the problem and informed of your right to file a
complaint with the FCC. In the event repairs are ever needed on your
modem, they should be performed by TOSHIBA Corporation or an
authorized representative of TOSHIBA Corporation.
Disconnection
If you should ever decide to permanently disconnect your modem from its
present line, please call the telephone company and let them know of this
change.
Fax branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any
person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message
via a telephone fax machine unless such message clearly contains in a
margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of
the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the
business, other entity or individual sending the message and the telephone
number of the sending machine or such business, other entity or individual.
In order to program this information into your fax modem, you should
complete the setup of your fax software before sending messages.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
vii
Instructions for IC CS-03 certified equipment
1. The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This
certification means that the equipment meets certain
telecommunications network protective, operational and safety
requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment
Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not
guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is
permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed
using an acceptable method of connection.
The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a
representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations
made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may
give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic
water pipe systems, if present, are connected together. This precaution
may be particularly important in rural areas.
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician,
as appropriate.
2. The user manual of analog equipment must contain the equipment’s
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) and an explanation notice similar to
the following:
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) of the modem, which can vary.
For the REN of your modem, refer to your modem’s label.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be
connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that
the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not
exceed 5.
3. The standard connecting arrangement (telephone jack type) for this
equipment is jack type(s): USOC RJ11C.
The IC registration number of the modem is shown below.
Canada: 4005B-ATHENS
Downloaded
viii
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Notes for Users in Australia and New Zealand
Modem warning notice for Australia
Modems connected to the Australian telecoms network must have a valid
Austel permit. This modem has been designed to specifically configure to
ensure compliance with Austel standards when the country/region selection
is set to Australia. The use of other country/region setting while the modem
is attached to the Australian PSTN would result in you modem being
operated in a non-compliant manner. To verify that the country/region is
correctly set, enter the command ATI which displays the currently active
setting.
To set the country/region permanently to Australia, enter the following
command sequence:
AT%TE=1
ATS133=1
AT&F
AT&W
AT%TE=0
ATZ
Failure to set the modem to the Australia country/region setting as shown
above will result in the modem being operated in a non-compliant manner.
Consequently, there would be no permit in force for this equipment and the
Telecoms Act 1991 prescribes a penalty of $12,000 for the connection of
non-permitted equipment.
Notes for use of this device in New Zealand
■ The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom
acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device
under all operating conditions. In particular the higher speeds at which
this modem is capable of operating depend on a specific network
implementation which is only one of many ways of delivering high
quality voice telephony to customers. Failure to operate should not be
reported as a fault to Telecom.
■ In addition to satisfactory line conditions a modem can only work
properly if:
a/ it is compatible with the modem at the other end of the call and.
b/ the application using the modem is compatible with the application
at the other end of the call - e.g., accessing the Internet requires
suitable software in addition to a modem.
■ This equipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute
a nuisance to other Telecom customers.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
ix
■ Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s PTC
Specifications are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with
this modem. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within
the following limits for compliance with Telecom Specifications:
a/ There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number
within any 30 minute period for any single manual call initiation, and
b/ The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30
seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the
next.
c/ Automatic calls to different numbers shall be not less than 5
seconds apart.
■ Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically
damaged, and arrange for its disposal or repair.
■ The correct settings for use with this modem in New Zealand are as
follows:
ATB0 (CCITT operation)
AT&G2 (1800 Hz guard tone)
AT&P1 (Decadic dialing make-break ratio =33%/67%)
ATS0=0 (not auto answer)
ATS6=4 (Blind dial delay)
ATS7=less than 90 (Time to wait to carrier after dialing)
ATS10=less than 150 (loss of carrier to hangup delay, factory
default of 15 recommended)
ATS11=90 (DTMF dialing on/off duration=90 ms)
ATX2 (Dial tone detect, but not (U.S.A.) call progress detect)
■ When used in the Auto Answer mode, the S0 register must be set with a
value of 3 or 4. This ensures:
■ a person calling your modem will hear a short burst of ringing before
the modem answers. This confirms that the call has been
successfully switched through the network.
■ caller identification information (which occurs between the first and
second ring cadences) is not destroyed.
■ The preferred method of dialing is to use DTMF tones (ATDT...) as this
is faster and more reliable than pulse (decadic) dialing. If for some
reason you must use decadic dialing, your communications program
must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table
as this modem does not implement the New Zealand “Reverse Dialing”
standard.
Number to be dialed: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number to program into computer: 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Note that where DTMF dialing is used, the numbers should be
entered normally.
x Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
■ The transmit level from this device is set at a fixed level and because of
this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than
optimal. Before reporting such occurrences as faults, please check the
line with a standard Telepermitted telephone, and only report a fault if
the phone performance is impaired.
■ It is recommended that this equipment be disconnected from the
Telecom line during electrical storms.
■ When relocating the equipment, always disconnect the Telecom line
connection before the power connection, and reconnect the power first.
■ This equipment may not be compatible with Telecom Distinctive Alert
cadences and services such as FaxAbility.
NOTE THAT FAULT CALLOUTS CAUSED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE
CAUSES MAY INCUR A CHARGE FROM TELECOM
General conditions
As required by PTC 100, please ensure that this office is advised of any
changes to the specifications of these products which might affect
compliance with the relevant PTC Specifications.
The grant of this Telepermit is specific to the above products with the
marketing description as stated on the Telepermit label artwork. The
Telepermit may not be assigned to other parties or other products without
Telecom approval.
A Telepermit artwork for each device is included from which you may
prepare any number of Telepermit labels subject to the general instructions
on format, size and color on the attached sheet.
The Telepermit label must be displayed on the product at all times as proof
to purchasers and service personnel that the product is able to be
legitimately connected to the Telecom network.
The Telepermit label may also be shown on the packaging of the product
and in the sales literature, as required in PTC 100.
The charge for a Telepermit assessment is $337.50. An additional charge
of $337.50 is payable where an assessment is based on reports against
non-Telecom New Zealand Specifications. $112.50 is charged for each
variation when submitted at the same time as the original.
An invoice for $NZ1237.50 will be sent under separate cover.
Following information is only for EU-member states:
The use of the symbol indicates that this product may not be treated as
household waste. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and
human health, which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste
handling of this product. For more detailed information about recycling of
this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste
disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xi
Optical disc drive safety instructions
Be sure to check the international precautions at the end of this section.
Panasonic
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW UJDA770TB-A
■ The DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive employs a laser system. To ensure
proper use of this product, please read this instruction manual carefully
and retain for future reference. Should the unit ever require
maintenance, contact an authorized service location.
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the
enclosure.
xiiDownloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
DVD Super Multi with Double Layer Recording UJ-841BTJ-J
■ The DVD Super Multi drive with Double Layer Recording model
employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of this product, please
read this instruction manual carefully and retain for future reference.
Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an authorized
service location.
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the
enclosure.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xiii
TEAC
CD-ROM CD-224E-NT4
■ The CD-ROM drive employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of
this product, please read this instruction manual carefully and retain for
future reference. Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an
authorized service location.
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the
enclosure.
Downloaded
xiv
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
DVD-ROM DV-28E-RT4
■ DVD-ROM drive employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of this
product, please read this instruction manual carefully and retain for
future reference. Should the unit ever require maintenance, contact an
authorized service location.
■ Use of controls, adjustments or the performance of procedures other
than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
■ To prevent direct exposure to the laser beam, do not try to open the
enclosure.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xv
International precautions
CAUTION: This appliance contains a
laser system and is classified as a
“CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.” To use
this model properly, read the instruction
manual carefully and keep this manual
for your future reference. In case of any
trouble with this model, please contact
your nearest “AUTHORIZED service
station.” To prevent direct exposure to the
laser beam, do not try to open the
enclosure.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1
PRODUKT
TOEN60825
ADVERSEL:USYNLIG
LASERSTRÅLING VED
ÅBNING, NÅR
SIKKERHEDSAF-BRYDER
ER UDE AF FUNKTION.
UNDGÅ UDSÆTTSLSE
FOR STRÅLING
VORSICHT: Dieses Gerät enthält ein
Laser-System und ist als
“LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT”
klassifiziert. Für den richtigen Gebrauch
dieses Modells lesen Sie bitte die
Bedienungsanleitung sorgfältig durch
und bewahren diese bitte als Referenz
auf. Falls Probleme mit diesem Modell
auftreten, benachrichtigen Sie bitte die
nächste “autorisierte Service-Vertretung”.
Um einen direkten Kontakt mit dem
Laserstrahl zu vermeiden darf das Gerät
nicht geöffnet werden.
ADVARSEL: Denne mærking er anbragt
udvendigt på apparatet og indikerer, at
apparatet arbejder med laserstråler af
klasse 1, hviket betyder, at der anvendes
laserstrlier af svageste klasse, og at man
ikke på apparatets yderside kan bilve
udsat for utilladellg kraftig stråling.
APPARATET BOR KUN ÅBNES AF
FAGFOLK MED SÆRLIGT KENDSKAB
TIL APPARATER MED
LASERSTRÅLER!
Indvendigt i apparatet er anbragt den her
gengivne advarselsmækning, som
advarer imod at foretage sådanne
indgreb i apparatet, at man kan komme til
at udsatte sig for laserstråling.
Downloaded
xvi
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
OBS! Apparaten innehåller
laserkomponent som avger laserstråining
överstigande gränsen för laserklass 1.
VAROITUS. Suojakoteloa si saa avata.
Laite sisältää laserdiodin, joka lähetää
näkymätöntä silmilie vaarallista
lasersäteilyä.
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR
ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE
OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S
MANUAL MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
VORSICHT: DIE VERWENDUNG VON
ANDEREN STEURUNGEN ODER
EINSTELLUNGEN ODER DAS
DURCHFÜHREN VON ANDEREN
VORGÄNGEN ALS IN DER
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BESCHRIEBEN KÖNNEN
GEFÄHRLICHE
STRAHLENEXPOSITIONEN ZUR
FOLGE HABEN.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xvii
Downloaded
xviii
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Preface
Congratulations on your purchase of the TECRA A8 / Satellite Pro A120
computer. This powerful notebook computer provides excellent expansion
capability, including multimedia devices, and it is designed to provide years
of reliable, high-performance computing.
This manual tells how to set up and begin using your TECRA A8 / Satellite
Pro A120 computer. It also provides detailed information on configuring
your computer, basic operations and care, using optional devices and
troubleshooting.
If you are a new user of computers or if you’re new to portable computing,
first read over the Introduction and The Grand Tour chapters to familiarize
yourself with the computer’s features, components and accessory devices.
Then read Getting Started for step-by-step instructions on setting up your
computer.
If you are an experienced computer user, please continue reading the
preface to learn how this manual is organized, then become acquainted
with this manual by browsing through its pages. Be sure to look over the
Special features section of the Introduction, to learn about features that are
uncommon or unique to the computers and carefully read HW Setup.
If you are going to install PC cards or connect external devices such as a
monitor, be sure to read Chapter 8, Optional Devices.
Manual contents
This manual is made up of the following.
Chapter 1, Introduction, is an overview of the computer’s features,
capabilities, and options.
Chapter 2, The Grand Tour, identifies the components of the computer and
briefly explains how they function.
Chapter 3, Getting Started, provides a quick overview of how to begin
operating your computer and gives tips on safety and designing your work
area.
Chapter 4, Operating Basics, describes the basic operations of your
computer and precautions when using it, as well as the handling of CD/
DVD.
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, describes special keyboard functions including
the keypad overlay and hot keys.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xix
Preface
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, gives details on the computer’s
power resources and battery save modes and how to set a password.
Chapter 7, HW Setup, explains how to configure the computer using the
HW Setup program and TPM.
Chapter 8, Optional Devices, describes the optional hardware available.
Chapter 9, Troubleshooting, provides helpful information on how to perform
some diagnostic tests, and suggests courses of action if the computer
doesn’t seem to be working properly.
Chapter 10, Legal Footnotes, provides Legal Footnote information related
to your computer.
The Appendixes provide technical information about your computer.
The Glossary defines general computer terminology and includes a list of
acronyms used in the text.
The Index quickly directs you to the information contained in this manual.
Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight
terms and operating procedures.
Abbreviations
On first appearance, and whenever necessary for clarity, abbreviations are
enclosed in parentheses following their definition. For example: Read Only
Memory (ROM). Acronyms are also defined in the Glossary.
Icons
Icons identify ports, dials, and other parts of your computer. The indicator
panel also uses icons to identify the components it is providing information
on.
Keys
The keyboard keys are used in the text to describe many computer
operations. A distinctive typeface identifies the key top symbols as they
appear on the keyboard. For example, Enter identifies the Enter key.
xxDownloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Preface
Key operation
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We
identify such operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus sign
(+). For example, Ctrl + C means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same
time press C. If three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the
same time press the third.
ABC
When procedures require an action such as
clicking an icon or entering text, the icon’s name
or the text you are to type in is represented in the
type face you see to the left.
Display
S
ABC
Names of windows or icons or text generated by
the computer that appear on its display screen
are presented in the type face you see to the left.
Messages
Messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your
attention. Each type of message is identified as shown below.
Pay attention! A caution informs you that improper use of equipment or
failure to follow instructions may cause data loss or damage your
equipment.
Please read. A note is a hint or advice that helps you make best use of
your equipment.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which could result in death or
serious injury, if you do not follow instructions.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xxi
Preface
Downloaded
xxii
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
General Precautions
TOSHIBA computers are designed to optimize safety, minimize strain and
withstand the rigors of portability. However, certain precautions should be
observed to further reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the
computer.
Be certain to read the general precautions below and to note the cautions
included in the text of the manual.
Creating a computer-friendly environment
Place the computer on a flat surface that is large enough for the computer
and any other items you are using, such as a printer. Leave enough space
around the computer and other equipment to provide adequate ventilation.
Otherwise, they may overheat.To keep your computer in prime operating
condition, protect your work area from:
■ Dust, moisture, and direct sunlight.
■ Equipment that generates a strong electromagnetic field, such as
stereo speakers (other than speakers that are connected to the
computer) or speakerphones.
■ Rapid changes in temperature or humidity and sources of temperature
change such as air conditioner vents or heaters.
■ Extreme heat, cold, or humidity.
■ Liquids and corrosive chemicals.
Stress injury
Carefully read the Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort. It contains
information on prevention of stress injuries to your hands and wrists than
can be caused by extensive keyboard use. Chapter 3, Getting Started, also
includes information on work space design, posture and lighting that can
help reduce physical stress.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xxiii
Heat injury
■ Avoid prolonged physical contact with the computer. If the computer is
used for long periods, its surface can become very warm. While the
temperature will not feel hot to the touch, if you maintain physical
contact with the computer for a long time (if you rest the computer on
your lap, or if you keep your hands on the palm rest, for example) your
skin might suffer low-heat injury.
■ If the computer has been used for a long time, avoid direct contact with
the metal plate supporting the I/O ports. It can become hot.
■ The surface of the AC adaptor can become hot when in use. This
condition does not indicate a malfunction. If you need to transport the
AC adaptor, disconnect it and let it cool before moving it.
■ Do not lay the AC adaptor on a material that is sensitive to heat. The
material could be damaged.
Pressure or impact damage
Do not apply heavy pressure to the computer or subject it to strong impact.
Excessive pressure or impact can cause damage to computer components
or otherwise cause malfunctions.
PC card overheating
Some PC cards can become hot with prolonged use. Overheating of a PC
card can result in errors or instability in the PC card operation. Also be
careful when you remove a PC card that has been used for a long time.
Mobile phone
Use of mobile phones can interfere with the audio system. Computer
operation is not impaired but it is recommended that a distance of 30 cm be
maintained between the computer and a mobile phone in use.
Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort
All important information on the safe and proper use of this computer is
described in the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort. Be sure
to read it before using the computer.
Downloaded
xxiv
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
TECRA M5
Table of Contents
Preface
Manual contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xx
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
General Precautions
Creating a computer-friendly environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stress injury. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat injury . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure or impact damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PC card overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxiii
xxiii
xxiv
xxiv
xxiv
xxiv
xxiv
Introduction
Equipment checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Special features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
The Grand Tour
Front with the display closed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front with the display open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-1
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-7
2-9
xxv
Table of Contents
System indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB floppy disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Region codes for DVD drives and media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Writable discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CD-ROM drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DVD Super Multi drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC adaptor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-15
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-17
2-17
Getting Started
Other Things to Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Connecting the AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Opening the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Turning on the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Starting up for the first time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Turning off the power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Shut Down mode (Boot mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Restarting the computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Create Optical Recovery Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Restoring the preinstalled software from the Recovery HDD. . . . . 3-10
Restoring the preinstalled software from
your creating Recovery Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Operating Basics
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using the Touch Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using the AccuPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
AccuPoint precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Replacing the cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Set Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Window Logon via Fingerprint Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Fingerprint Power-on Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Downloaded
xxvi
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Table of Contents
Connecting USB floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Connecting USB floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Disconnecting USB floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Using optical disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Loading discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Removing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
How to remove CD/DVD when the disc tray will not open. . . . . . . . 4-14
Writing CDs on DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Before writing or rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
When writing or rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Important message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Before writing or rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
When writing or rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
RecordNow! Basic for TOSHIBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Data Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
DLA for TOSHIBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
When using WinDVD Creator Platinum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
How to make a DVD-Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
How to learn more about InterVideo WinDVD Creator . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Important information for use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Media care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
CD/DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Floppy disks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Microphone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Region selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Properties menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Modem Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Wireless communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Wireless LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Bluetooth wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
BluetoothTM Stack for Windows® by TOSHIBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Wireless communication switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Wireless communication Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xxvii
Table of Contents
LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAN cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting LAN cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disconnecting LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heat dispersal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-34
4-34
4-34
4-35
4-35
4-36
4-36
4-38
4-39
4-40
The Keyboard
Typewriter keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function keys: F1 … F12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft keys: Fn key combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulating keys on enhanced keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fn Sticky key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows special keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keypad overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning on the overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporarily changing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating ASCII characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-9
Power and Power-Up Modes
Power conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Power indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Battery indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
DC IN indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Power indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Battery types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Real Time Clock (RTC) battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Care and use of the battery pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Charging the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Monitoring battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Maximizing battery operating time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Retaining data with power off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Extending battery life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Replacing the battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Downloaded
xxviii
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Table of Contents
TOSHIBA Password Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Supervisor Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Starting the computer by password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Power-up modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Windows utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Hot keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Panel power on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
System Auto Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
HW Setup
Accessing HW Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
HW Setup window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Configuring the Execute-Disable Bit Capability and TPM . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Execute-Disable Bit Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Beep Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Optional Devices
PC card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Inserting a PC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Removing a PC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
SD card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Formatting an SD memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Inserting an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Removing an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
SD card care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Creation of a boot disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Memory expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Installing a memory module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Installing a memory module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Battery pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
AC adaptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Battery charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
USB floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
External monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Using the TOSHIBA Assist button or TOSHIBA Presentation button8-11
Changing the resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
i.LINK (IEEE1394) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xxix
Table of Contents
Advanced Port Replicator III Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Security lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Troubleshooting
Problem solving process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Preliminary checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Analyzing the problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Hardware and system checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
System start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Self test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Internal LCD display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
CD-ROM drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
DVD-ROM drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
DVD Super Multi drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
USB floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
PC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Dual Pointing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Fingerprint Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Bios Beep Sounds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Memory expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
External monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Wireless LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
TV output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Recovery Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Disposing of PC and PC batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
TOSHIBA support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Before you call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Where to write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Downloaded
xxx
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Table of Contents
Legal Footnotes
CPU*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
General Main Memory*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Battery Life*3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
LCD*5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Wireless LAN*7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Non-applicable Icons*8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Copy Protection*9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Images*10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Appendix A Specifications
Appendix B Display Controller and Modes
Appendix C AT Commands
Appendix D S-registers
Appendix E V.90
Appendix F Wireless LAN
Appendix G Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Appendix H AC Power Cord and Connectors
Appendix I TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer
Glossary
Index
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
xxxi
Table of Contents
Downloaded
xxxii
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter provides an equipment checklist, and it identifies the
computer’s features, options and accessories.
Some of the features described in this manual may not function properly if
you use an operating system that was not preinstalled by TOSHIBA.
Equipment checklist
Carefully unpack your computer. Save the box and packing materials for
future use.
Hardware
Check to make sure you have all the following items:
■ TECRA A8 / Satellite Pro A120 Portable Personal Computer
■ AC adaptor and power cord (2-pin plug or 3-pin plug)
■ USB floppy disk drive (Option or provided with some models)
■ Spare AccuPoint (pointing device) cap
■ Battery pack (installed in the computer)
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
1-1
Introduction
Software
Microsoft® Windows XP
■ The following software is preinstalled:
Depending on the model, some software is not preinstalled
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Microsoft® Windows XP
Microsoft Internet Explorer
TOSHIBA Utilities
TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility
DVD Video Player
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device Utility
TOSHIBA TouchPad ON/OFF Utility
TOSHIBA Power Saver
TOSHIBA Mobile Extension
TOSHIBA Assist
TOSHIBA ConfigFree
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool
TOSHIBA Controls
TOSHIBA Password Utility
Fingerprint Utility
Online manual
Documentation
■ TECRA A8 / Satellite Pro A120 Portable Personal Computer User's
Manual
■ Microsoft Windows XP manual package
Depending on the model, this manual is not included.
■ Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort
■ End User License Agreement
If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact your dealer
immediately.
Features
The computer uses TOSHIBA’s advanced Large Scale Integration (LSI),
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) technology
extensively to provide compact size, minimum weight, low power usage,
and high reliability. This computer incorporates the following features and
benefits:
Downloaded
1-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Introduction
Processor
■ Built-in
The computer is equipped with one of the
following Intel® processors.
■ Intel® CoreTM Duo Processor, which
incorporates a 2MB level 2 cache memory. It
also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®
Technology.
■ Intel® CoreTM Solo Processor, which
incorporates a 2MB level 2 cache memory. It
also supports Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep®
Technology.
■ Intel® Celeron® M Processor, which
incorporates a 1MB level 2 cache memory.
Some models in this series carry Intel® Centrino® Duo Mobile Technology,
which is based on three separate technologies of Intel® Core™ Duo
processor, Intel® PRO/Wireless Network Connection, and Mobile Intel®
945 Express Chipset Family.
Some models of the computers carry Intel® Centrino® Mobile Technology,
which is based on three separate technologies of Intel® Core™ Solo
processor, Intel® PRO/Wireless Network Connection, and Mobile Intel®
945 Express Chipset Family.
Legal Footnote (CPU)*1
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding CPU, please refer to
the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the *1.
Memory
Slots
256, 512, 1,024 or 2,048 MB memory modules
can be installed in the two memory slots for a
maximum of 4,096 MB. (Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo
Processor model)
256, 512, or 1,024 MB memory modules can be
installed in the two memory slots for a maximum
of 2,048 MB. (Intel® Celeron® M Processor model)
Video RAM
Part of system memory is used for Video RAM.
Intel® Celeron® M Processor model:
up to 128MB
Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo Processor model:
up to 128MB (Main memory size: 256MB)
256MB (Main memory size: 512MB,
768MB, 1,024MB or more).
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
1-3
Introduction
Legal Footnote (General Main Memory)*2
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding General Main
Memory, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click
the *2.
Power
Battery pack
The computer is powered by one rechargeable
lithium-ion battery pack.
Legal Footnote (Battery Life)*3
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Battery Life, please
refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the *3.
RTC battery
The internal RTC battery backs up the Real Time
Clock (RTC) and calendar.
AC adaptor
The AC adaptor provides power to the system
and recharges the batteries when they are low. It
comes with a detachable power cord which will
either have a 2-pin or 3-pin plug enclosure.
Because it is universal, it can receive a range of
AC voltage from 100 to 240 volts; however, the
output current varies among different models.
Using the wrong model can damage your
computer. Refer to the AC adaptor section in
Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.
Disks
Hard Disk Drive
(HDD) Capacity
Available in five sizes.
■ 40.0 billion bytes (37.26 GB)
■ 60.0 billion bytes (55.89 GB)
■ 80.0 billion bytes (74.53 GB)
■ 100.0 billion bytes (93.16 GB)
■ 120.0 billion bytes (111.79 GB)
Part of the space in the hard disk drive is
reserved as administration space.
Legal Footnote (Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity)*4
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Hard Disk Drive
(HDD) Capacity, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10.
Click the *4.
Downloaded
1-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Introduction
USB floppy disk
drive
Accommodates either 3 1/2" 1.44-megabyte or
720-kilobyte floppy disk. It connects to a USB
port. Optional or provide with some models.
Optical disk drive
Computers in this series can be configured with an optical disk drive
installed. The available optical disk drives are described below.
CD-ROM drive
Some models are equipped with a full-size, CDROM drive module that lets you run CD without
using an adaptor. It reads CD-ROMs at
maximum 24 speed. This drive supports the
following formats:
■ CD-DA
■ CD-Text
■ Photo CD™ (single/multi-session)
■ CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2
■ CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1, Form2)
■ Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA)
■ Addressing Method 2
DVD-ROM drive
Some models are equipped with a full-size, DVDROM drive module that lets you run either 12 cm
(4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CDs or 12cm (4.72")
DVDs without using an adaptor. It runs DVDROMs at maximum 8 speed and CD-ROMs at
maximum 24 speed. The drive supports the
following formats:
■ DVD-ROM
■ DVD-Video
■ CD-DA
■ CD-Text
■
■
■
■
■
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Photo CDTM (single/multi-session)
CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1, Form2)
Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA)
Addressing Method 2
1-5
Introduction
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW
drive
Some models are equipped with a full-size, DVDROM&CD-R/RW drive module that lets you run
CD/DVDs without using an adaptor. It reads
DVD-ROMs at maximum 8 speed and CD-ROMs
at maximum 24 speed. It writes CD-R at up to 24
speed and CD-RW at up to 24 speed. This drive
supports the following formats in addition to
DVD-ROM drive.
■ CD-R
■ CD-RW
DVD Super Multi
drive
Some models are equipped with a full-size DVD
Super Multi drive module that lets you record
data to rewritable CD/DVDs as well as run either
12cm (4.72") or 8cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without
using an adaptor. It reads DVD-ROMs at
maximum 8 speed and CD-ROMs at maximum
24 speed. It writes CD-R at maximum 24 speed,
CD-RW at maximum 10 speed, DVD-R and
DVD+R at maximum 8 speed, DVD-RW and
DVD+RW at maximum 4 speed, DVD-R DL at
maximum 2 speed, DVD+R DL at maximum 2.4
speed, DVD-RAM at maximum 5 speed.This
drive supports the following formats in addition to
DVD-ROM&CDR/ RW drive.
■ DVD-R
■ DVD-RW
■ DVD-RAM
■ DVD-R DL
■ DVD+R
■ DVD+RW
■ DVD+R DL
2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM discs cannot be read from or written to.
Downloaded
1-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Introduction
Display
The computer’ LCD display panel supports high-resolution video graphics.
The LCD screen can be set at a wide range of viewing angles for maximum
comfort and readability.
Built-in
15.4" TFT LCD screen, 16 million colors, with
one of the following resolution:
■ WXGA, 1280 horizontal × 800 vertical pixels
Legal Footnote (LCD)*5
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding LCD, please refer to
the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the *5.
Graphics controller
The graphics controller maximizes display
performance. Refer to Appendix B, Display
Controller and Modes, for more information.
Legal Footnote (Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU"))*6
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Graphics Processor
Unit (“GPU”), please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10.
Click the *6.
Keyboard
Built-in
85 keys or 87 keys, compatible with IBM®
enhanced keyboard, embedded numeric overlay,
dedicated cursor control,
and
keys.
Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device
Built-in Touch Pad
A Touch Pad and control buttons in the palm rest
enable control of the on-screen pointer and
scrolling of windows.
Built-in AccuPoint
This pointer control stick, located in the center of
the keyboard, provides convenient control of the
cursor.
Ports
Serial
RS-232C compatible port (16550UART
compatible).
External monitor
Analog VGA port supports VESA DDC2B
compatible functions.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
1-7
Introduction
Universal Serial Bus
(USB 2.0)
The computer has three Universal Serial Bus
ports that comply with the USB 2.0 standard.
Docking
This port enables connection of an optional
Advanced Port Replicator III Plus described in
the Options section.
i.LINK™ (IEEE1394)
This port enables high-speed data transfer
directly from external devices such as digital
video cameras.
Slots
PC card
The PC card slot accommodates a Type II card.
SD card
This slot lets you easily transfer data from
devices, such as digital cameras and Personal
Digital Assistants that use SD card flashmemory.
Refer to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.
Multimedia
Downloaded
1-8
Sound system
The Windows sound system compatible sound
system provides output to internal speakers and
a microphone as well as supporting jacks for an
external microphone and headphones.
Video-out jack
(S-Video)
The video out jack lets you transfer video data to
external devices. Data output depends on the
type of device connected to the S-Video cable.
Headphone jack
A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack enables
connection of stereo headphones.
Microphone jack
A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for
monaural microphone input.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Introduction
Communications
Modem
An internal modem provides capability for data
and fax communication supporting the V.90
(V.92) standards. Refer to V.90 section in
Appendix E. The speed of data transfer and fax
depends on analog telephone line conditions. It
has a modem jack for connecting to a telephone
line. It is preinstalled as a standard device in
some markets. Both the V.90 and V.92 standards
are supported only in the USA, Canada, UK,
France, Germany and Australia. Only V.90 is
available in other regions.
LAN
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet
LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast
Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000
megabits per second, 1000BASE-T (only for
Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo Processor model)).
Bluetooth
Some computers in this series are equipped with
Bluetooth functions. Bluetooth wireless
technology eliminates the need for cables
between electronic devices such as computers
and printers. Bluetooth provides fast, reliable,
and secure wireless communication in a small
space.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
1-9
Introduction
Wireless LAN
Some computers in this series are equipped with
a Wireless LAN card that is compatible with other
LAN systems based on Direct Sequence Spread
Spectrum/Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing radio technology that complies with
the IEEE 802.11 Standard (Revision A, B or G).
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 54Mbps
(IEEE802.11a, 802.11g)
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 11Mbps
(IEEE802.11b)
■ Frequency Channel Selection (5 GHz:
Revision A / 2.4 GHz: Revision B/G)
■ Roaming over multiple channels
■ Card Power Management
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data
encryption, based on 128 bit encryption
algorithm. (Intel module type).
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data
encryption, based on 152 bit encryption
algorithm. (Atheros module type)
■ Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).
■ Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) data
encryption.
■ Wake-up on Wireless LAN (Intel module
type)
■ The values shown above are the theoretical maximums for Wireless
LAN standards. The actual values may differ.
■ The transmission speed over the Wireless LAN and the distance over
which Wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.
The transmission rate described is the theoretical maximum speed as
specified under the appropriate standard - the actual transmission
speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum speed.
Legal Footnote (Wireless LAN)*7
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Wireless LAN,
please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the *7.
Wireless
communication
switch
Downloaded
1-10
This switch turns the Wireless LAN and
Bluetooth functions on and off.
All models are provided with Wireless
Communication switch. Some models are equipped
with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Introduction
Security
Security lock slot
Allows the connection of a security lock to anchor
the computer to a desk or other large object.
Special features
The following features are either unique to TOSHIBA computers or are
advanced features, which make the computer more convenient to use.
TOSHIBA Assist
button
Press this button to automatically launch a
predefined application or perform a predefined
function. The default is TOSHIBA Assist.
TOSHIBA
Presentation button
Press this button to change internal display,
external display, simultaneous display, or multimonitor display.
Hot keys
Hot keys are specific key combinations that let
you quickly change the system configuration
directly from the keyboard without running a
system program.
Display automatic
power off
This feature automatically cuts off power to the
computer’s LCD display panel when there is no
keyboard input for a specified time. Power is
restored when any key is pressed. You can
specify the time in the Monitor power off item of
the Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
HDD automatic
power off
This feature automatically cuts off power to the
hard disk drive when it is not accessed for a
specified time. Power is restored when the hard
disk is accessed. You can specify the time in the
HDD power off item of the Basic Setup tab in
TOSHIBA Power Saver.
System automatic
Standby/Hibernation
This feature automatically shuts down the system
into Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode when
there is no input or hardware access for a time
specified. You can specify the time and select
either the System Standby or System Hibernation
item of the Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power
Saver.
Keypad overlay
A ten-key pad is integrated into the keyboard.
Refer to the Keypad overlay section in Chapter 5,
The Keyboard, for instructions on using the
keypad overlay.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
1-11
Introduction
Downloaded
1-12
Power on password
Two levels of password security, supervisor and
user, are available to prevent unauthorized
access to your computer.
Instant security
A hot key function blanks the LCD screen and
disables the computer providing data security.
Intelligent power
supply
A microprocessor in the computer’s intelligent
power supply detects the battery’s charge and
calculates the remaining battery capacity. It also
protects electronic components from abnormal
conditions, such as voltage overload from an AC
adaptor. You can monitor remaining battery
capacity by using the Battery remaining item in
TOSHIBA Power Saver.
Battery save mode
This feature lets you save battery power. You can
specify the Power Save Mode in the Profile item
in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
Panel power on/off
This feature turns power to the computer off
when the computer’s LCD display panel is closed
and turns it back on when the computer’s LCD
display panel is opened. You can specify the
setting in the When I close the lid item of the
Setup Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
Low battery
automatic
hibernation
When battery power is exhausted to the point that
computer operation cannot be continued, the
system automatically enters Hibernation and
shuts down. You can specify the setting in the
Setup Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
Heat dispersal
To protect from overheating, the CPU has an
internal temperature sensor. If the computer’s
internal temperature rises to a certain level, the
cooling fan is turned on or the processing speed
is lowered. Use the Cooling Method item of the
Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
HDD Protection
Using the acceleration sensor built in the
computer, the HDD Protection function detects
vibration, shocks, and those signs in the
computer, and automatically moves the HDD
(Hard Disk Drive) head to the safe position to
reduce the risk of damage that could be caused
to the disk by head-to-disk contact. Refer to the
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection
section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics, for
details.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Introduction
The HDD Protection function does not guarantee that the hard disk drive
will not be damaged.
Hibernation
This feature lets you turn off the power without
exiting from your software. The contents of main
memory are saved to the hard disk so that when
you next turn the power on again, you can
continue working right where you left off. Refer to
the Turning off the power section in Chapter 3,
Getting Started, for details.
Standby
If you have to interrupt your work, you can turn off
the power without exiting from your software.
Data is maintained in the computer’s main
memory. When you turn on the power again, you
can continue working right where you left off.
Utilities
This section describes preinstalled utilities and tells how to start them. For
details on operations, refer to each utility’s online manual, help files or
readme.txt files.
TOSHIBA Power
Saver
To access the power management program, click
start, click Control Panel, click Performance
and Maintenance and click the TOSHIBA
Power Saver icon.
HW Setup
This program lets you customize your hardware
settings according to the way you work with your
computer and the peripherals you use. To start
the utility, To access this utility, click start, click
Control Panel, click Printers and Other
Hardware and click the TOSHIBA HWSetup
icon.
TOSHIBA Controls
This utility lets you assign applications or
functions to the TOSHIBA Presentation button
(default setting is the simultaneous display on
LCD and CRT with resolution of 1,024 × 768) and
to the TOSHIBA Assist button (default setting is
the TOSHIBA Assist).
To access this utility, click start, point to Control
Panel, choose Printers and Other Hardware
and click the Toshiba Controls icon.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
1-13
Introduction
Fingerprint utility
This product has a fingerprint utility installed for
the purpose of enrolling and recognizing
fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password to
the fingerprint authentication device, it is no
longer necessary to input the password from the
keyboard. Fingerprint feature enables you to:
■ Logon to Windows and access a securityenabled homepage through IE (Internet
Explorer).
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted
and third party access to them prevented.
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver
when returning from power-saving (e.g.
standby) mode.
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if
applicable, HDD (Hard Disk Drive) Password)
when booting up the computer.(Power-on
Security)
■ Single Sign-on feature
Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module
installed.
Fn-esse
This Windows program lets you define your own
“shortcut” keys to quickly launch applications and
speed your work in Windows. To start the utility,
click start, point to All Programs, point to
TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click Fn-esse.
DVD Video Player
The DVD Video Player is used to play
DVD-Videos. It has an on-screen interface and
functions. Click start, point to All Programs,
point to InterVideo WinDVD, then click
InterVideo WinDVD.
Bluetooth Stack for
Windows by Toshiba
This software enables communication between
remote Bluetooth devices.
Bluetooth cannot be used in models that do not have a Bluetooth module
installed.
Downloaded
1-14
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Introduction
TOSHIBA SD
Memory Boot Utility
The TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot utility allows you
to create a bootable SD memory card to start the
system. You can access TOSHIBA SD Memory
Boot Utility from the menu bar as follows. Click
start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA,
point to Utilities and click SD Memory Boot
Utility.
TOSHIBA Zooming
Utility
This utility allows you to enlarge or reduce the
icon size on the desktop or the application
window.
RecordNow! Basic
for TOSHIBA
You can create CD/DVDs in several formats
including audio CDs that can be played on a
standard stereo CD player and data CD/DVDs to
store the files and folders on your hard disk drive.
This software can be used on a model with DVDROM&CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive.
TOSHIBA Assist
TOSHIBA Assist is a graphical user interface that
provides easy access to help and services. It is
the default function launched by the TOSHIBA
Assist button.
TOSHIBA PC
Diagnostic Tool
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool displays the basic
information on the computer's configuration and
allows some of the built-in devices functionality to
be tested. To start TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool,
click start, point to All Programs, point to
TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click PC
Diagnostic Tool.
TOSHIBA Mobile
Extension
This utility enhances the function of your
computer when docking to an optional Advanced
Port Replicator III Plus. To access the utility,
select TOSHIBA Mobile Extension from the
TOSHIBA Assist application.
TOSHIBA ConfigFree TOSHIBA ConfigFree is a suite of utilities to
allow easy control of communication devices and
network connections. TOSHIBA ConfigFree also
allows you to find communication problems and
create profiles for easy switching between
locations and communication networks. To start
ConfigFree, click start, point to All Programs,
point to TOSHIBA, point to Networking and click
ConfigFree.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
1-15
Introduction
TOSHIBA Dual
Pointing Device
utility
This utility has the following functions;
To disable/enable TOSHIBA Dual Pointing
Device with Fn + F9 keys. To customize the
functions of TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device
easily.
TOSHIBA Touchpad
ON/OFF Utility
This utility has the following function. To disable/
enable the Touch Pad with Fn + F9 key.
TOSHIBA Password
Utility
This utility lets you set a password that restricts
access to the computer.
TOSHIBA
Accessibility
This utility lets you make the Fn key sticky, that
is, you can press it once, release it, and then
press an “F number” key. The Fn key remains
active until another key is pressed.
DLA for TOSHIBA
DLA (Drive Letter Access) is the packet writing
software which allows you to writes files and/or
folders to DVD-RW, CD-RW and DVD+RW discs
via a drive letter like a floppy disk or other
removable disks.
TOSHIBA Hotkey
Utility for Display
Devices
This utility lets you change the display device and
the display resolution. Press Fn + F5 to change
the active display device. Press Fn + Space keys
to change the display resolution.
TOSHIBA SD
Memory Boot Utility
The TOSHIBA SD memory boot utility allows you
to create a bootable SD memory card to start the
system. You can access TOSHIBA SD Memory
Boot Utility from the menu bar as follows. Click
start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA,
point to Utilities and click SD Memory Boot
Utility.
TOSHIBA SD
To set this utility, click start, point to All
Memory Card Format Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to Utilities
and click TOSHIBA SD Memory Card Format.
CD/DVD Drive
Acoustic Silencer
Downloaded
1-16
This utility allows you to configure the read speed
of the optical disc drive. You can either configure
Normal Mode, which operates the drive at its
maximum speed for quick data access, or Quiet
Mode which runs audio CDs at single speed and
which can lessen operational noise.
It is ineffective in DVD.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Introduction
Options
You can add a number of options to make your computer even more
powerful and convenient to use. The following options are available:
Memory Kit
A 256, 512 or 1,024 MB (DDR2-667/533/400)
memory module can easily be installed in Intel®
Celeron® M Processor models.
A 256, 512, 1,024 MB (DDR2-667/533/400), or
2,048 MB memory module (DDR2-667) can be
installed in Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo Processor
models.
Battery pack
An battery pack (3600 mAh or 4400 mAh) can be
additionally purchased from your TOSHIBA
dealer. Use it as a spare or replacement.
Universal
AC adaptor
If you use your computer at more than one site
frequently, it may be convenient to purchase an
additional AC adaptor for each site so you will not
have to carry the adaptor with you.
Battery charger
The battery charger lets you charge extra
batteries outside the computer.
Security lock
A slot is available to attach a security cable to the
computer to deter theft.
USB floppy disk
drive Kit
The USB floppy disk drive accommodates either
3 1/2" 1.44-megabyte or 720-kilobyte floppy disk
through connection to a USB port. Please note
that you cannot format 720-kilobyte floppy disks
under Windows XP, but you are able to use disks
that have been previously formatted.
Advanced Port
Replicator III Plus
The Advanced Port Replicator III Plus provides
the ports available on the computer in addition to
separate PS/2 mouse and PS/2 keyboard ports,
a digital visual interface (DVI) port, i.LINK™
(IEEE1394) port, line-in jack and line-out jack,
External monitor port, Universal Serial Bus port
(USB2.0) × 4, LAN jack, Modem jack, Serial port,
Parallel port.
Bluetooth Kit
This option enables Bluetooth wireless
communications in computers that do not have
Bluetooth preinstalled. It is installed by dealers
only.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
1-17
Introduction
Downloaded
1-18
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 2
The Grand Tour
This chapter identifies the various components of your computer. Become
familiar with each component before you operate the computer.
Legal Footnote (Non-applicable Icons)*8
For more information on the Legal Footnote regarding Non-applicable
Icons, please refer to the Legal Footnotes section in Chapter 10. Click the
*8.
Front with the display closed
Figure 2-1 shows the computer’s front with its LCD display panel in the
closed position.
Display latch
System
indicators
Microphone jack
Headphone jack
Volume
Wireless communication switch
Figure 2-1 Front of the computer with LCD display panel closed
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-1
The Grand Tour
System indicators
These LEDs let you monitor the status of various
computer functions. Details are given in the
System indicators section.
Wireless
communication
switch
Slide this switch to the left to turn off Wireless
LAN and Bluetooth functions. Slide it to the right
to turn on the functions.
All models are provided with a Wireless
Communication switch although only some
models are equipped with both Wireless LAN
and Bluetooth functions.
■ Turn Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a
person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical
electric device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of
your medical device when using any Wireless LAN or Bluetooth
functionality.
■ Always turn off Wireless LAN or Bluetooth functionality if the PC is near
automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or
fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,
possibly resulting in serious injury.
■ Do not use the Wireless LAN or Bluetooth functionalities near a
microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic
fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt
Wireless LAN or Bluetooth operation.
Downloaded
2-2
Display latch
This latch secures the LCD display panel in its
closed position. Slide the latch to open the LCD
display panel.
Microphone jack
A 3.5 mm mini microphone jack enables
connection of a three-conductor mini jack for
monaural microphone input.
Volume control
Use this dial to adjust the volume of the stereo
speakers and the stereo headphones.
Headphone jack
A 3.5 mm mini headphone jack enables
connection of stereo headphones.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Grand Tour
Left side
Figure 2-2 shows the computer’s left side.
SD card slot
Cooling vents
PC card eject button
PC card slot
Figure 2-2 The left side of the computer
Cooling vents
Cooling vents help CPU keep from overheating.
Do not block the cooling vents. Never allow metal objects, such as screws,
staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or keyboard. Foreign metal objects
can create a short circuit, which can cause PC damage and fire, possibly
resulting in serious injury.
PC card slot
The PC card slot can accommodate a Type II
card. The slot supports 16-bit PC cards and
CardBus PC cards.
PC card eject button
This button is used to remove a PC card from the
PC card slot.
Keep foreign objects out of the PC card slot. Never allow metal objects,
such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or keyboard.
Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can cause PC
damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
SD card slot
SD cards are used in a wide variety of external
devices. This slot lets you transfer data from the
device to your computer.
Keep foreign objects out of the SD card slot. A pin or similar object can
damage the computer’s circuitry.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-3
The Grand Tour
Right side
Figure 2-3 shows the computer’s right side.
Optical disk drive
Security lock slot
Figure 2-3 The right side of the computer
Security lock slot
A security cable attaches to this slot. The
optional security cable anchors your computer to
a desk or other large object to deter theft.
Optical disk drive
A CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW
drive or DVD Super Multi is installed.
Back side
Figure 2-4 shows the computer’s back side.
Video-out jack
Modem jack
Serial port
LAN active
indicator (orange)
DC IN 15V jack
USB ports
External monitor port
Link indicator
(green)
LAN jack
i.LINK (IEEE1394) port
Figure 2-4 The back side of the computer
Video-out jack
Plug an S-Video cable into this jack for video-out.
The S-Video cable carries video signal.
Depending on the model, a Video-out jack is not present.
Downloaded
2-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Grand Tour
External monitor
port
This external monitor port lets you connect an
external video display.
DC IN 15V jack
The AC adaptor connects to this jack. Use only
the model of AC adaptor that comes with the
computer. Using the wrong adaptor can damage
your computer.
Modem jack
The modem jack lets you use a modular cable to
connect the modem directly to a telephone line.
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line
could cause a PC system failure.
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for
residences or offices.
■ Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see
lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the PC. An electric surge
caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or
hardware damage.
LAN jack
This jack lets you connect to a LAN. The adaptor
has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10
megabits per second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet
LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASE-TX)
and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per
second, 1000BASE-T (only for Intel® CoreTM
Duo/Solo Processor models)). The LAN has two
indicators. Refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics,
for details.
■ Do not connect any cable other than a LAN cable to the LAN jack. It
could cause damage or malfunction.
■ Do not connect the LAN cable to a power supply. It could cause
damage or malfunction.
Link indicator
(green)
This indicator glows green when the computer is
connected to a LAN and the LAN is functioning
properly.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-5
The Grand Tour
LAN active indicator
(orange)
This indicator glows orange when data is being
exchanged between the computer and the LAN.
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
port
This port allows you to connect an external
device, such as a digital video camera for highspeed data transfer.
Depending on the model, an i.LINK (IEEE1394) port is not present.
Serial port
Use this 9-pin port to connect serial devices such
as an external modem, serial mouse or serial
printer.
Depending on the model, a serial port is not present.
Universal Serial Bus
(USB 2.0) ports
Three Universal Serial Bus ports are on the back
side. The ports comply with the USB 2.0
standard.
Keep foreign objects out of the USB connectors. Never allow metal
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can
cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
Operation of all functions of all USB devices has not been confirmed.
Some functions might not execute properly.
Downloaded
2-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Grand Tour
Underside
Figure 2-5 shows the underside of the computer. Make sure the display is
closed before turning over your computer.
Notches
Memory
module cover
Docking
port
Battery pack
HDD pack cover screw
HDD pack cover
Battery
release latch
Battery lock
Figure 2-5 The underside of the computer
Battery lock
Slide the battery lock to release the battery pack
for removal.
Battery pack
The battery pack powers the computer when the
AC adaptor is not connected. For detailed
information on the battery pack, refer to Chapter
6, Power and Power-Up Modes.
Notches
Notches on the computer engage hooks on the
Advanced Port Replicator III Plus to ensure a
secure connection.
Battery release
latch
Slide and hold this latch to release the battery
pack for removal.
For detailed information on removing the battery
pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes.
Docking port
This port enables connection of an optional
Advanced Port Replicator III Plus described in
Chapter 8, Optional Devices.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-7
The Grand Tour
■ Only the Advanced Port Replicator III plus can be used with this
computer. Do not attempt to use any other Port Replicator.
■ Keep foreign objects out of the docking port. A pin or similar object can
damage the computer's circuitry. A plastic shutter protects the
connector.
Downloaded
2-8
Memory module
cover
This cover protects memory module sockets.
Refer to the Memory expansion section in
Chapter 8, Optional Devices.
HDD pack cover
screw
Two screws secure the HDD pack cover.
HDD pack cover
A HDD pack is under this, which can be removed
and reinstalled. For more information on how to
remove or reinstall the USB floppy disk drive,
refer to the section on the in Chapter 8, Optional
Devices.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Grand Tour
Front with the display open
This section shows the computer with the LCD display panel open. Refer to
the appropriate illustration for details. To open the LCD display panel, slide
the display latch on the front of the LCD display panel and lift up. Position
the LCD display panel at a comfortable viewing angle.
Display hinge
LCD screen
Stereo speaker (Right)
LCD Sensor switch
(Not shown)
Stereo speaker
(Left)
Power button
TOSHIBA Assist
button
AccuPoint
Touch Pad
Fingerprint
Sensor
Touch Pad
control buttons
Accupoint control button
TOSHIBA Presentation button
Figure 2-6 The front of the computer with the LCD display panel open
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-9
The Grand Tour
Downloaded
2-10
Display hinge
The display hinge holds the LCD display panel at
easy-to-view angles.
Fingerprint sensor
Fingerprint feature enables you to:
■ Logon to Windows and access a securityenabled homepage through IE (Internet
Explorer).
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted
and third party access to them prevented.
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver
when returning from power-saving (e.g.
standby) mode.
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if
applicable HDD (Hard Disk Drive) Password)
when booting up the computer.(Power-on
Security)
■ Single Sign-on feature
LCD screen
The LCD screen displays high-contrast text and
graphics. You can change the resolution
between 800 x 600 and 1,280 x 800 pixels.
Refer to Display Controller and Modes section in
Appendix B.
When the computer operates on the AC adaptor
the LCD screen’s image will be somewhat
brighter than when it operates on battery power.
The lower brightness level is intended to save
battery power.
Stereo speakers
The speakers emit sound generated by your
software as well as audio alarms, such as low
battery condition, generated by the system.
AccuPoint control
buttons
Control buttons below the keyboard let you select
menu items or manipulate text and graphics
designated by the on-screen pointer. Refer to the
Using the AccuPoint section in Chapter 4,
Operating Basics.
AccuPoint
A pointer control device located in the center of
the keyboard is used to control the on-screen
pointer. Refer to the Using the AccuPoint section
in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Touch Pad control
buttons
Control buttons below the Touch Pad let you
select menu items or manipulate text and
graphics designated by the on-screen pointer.
Touch Pad
A Touch Pad located in the center of the palm
rest is used to control the on-screen pointer.
Refer to the Using the Touch Pad section in
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Grand Tour
TOSHIBA
Presentation button
Press this button to display the same image on
both internal and external monitors or to use
multi-monitor display (Windows XP Only).
The default setting is "Presentation (Same Image
1,024 × 768)". The same image is displayed on
the internal and external monitor with screen
resolution 1,024 × 768.
In the setting of "Presentation (Different Image)",
you can use the internal and external monitors as
a widescreen.
This setting is supported in Windows XP only.
Pressing the button again can be changed single
display mode on an internal monitor only.
You can specify the function of TOSHIBA
Presentation button in the TOSHIBA Controls
properties.
TOSHIBA Assist
button
Press this button to launch the program. The
default is TOSHIBA Assist.
When the computer is in Standby or Hibernation
Mode or turned off, press this button to start the
computer and launch the program.
You can specify the function of TOSHIBA Assist
button in the TOSHIBA Controls properties.
Power button
Press the power button to turn the computer’s
power on and off.
LCD Sensor switch
This switch senses when the computer’s LCD
display panel is closed or opened and activates
the Panel Power Off/On feature. When you close
the LCD display panel the computer enters
Hibernation Mode and shuts down. When you
open the computer's LCD display panel the
computer starts in Hibernation Mode. Use the
TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility to enable or
disable this feature. The default is “enabled”.
Refer to the TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility and
Panel Power Off/On items in Chapter 1, Special
features, for details on settings.
Do not put a magnetic object close to the switch. The computer will
automatically enter Hibernation Mode and shut down even if the Panel
Power Off feature is disabled.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-11
The Grand Tour
System indicators
LEDs at the left side of the icons, light when various computer operations
are in progress.
Figure 2-7 System indicators
Downloaded
2-12
SD card
The SD card indicator glows green when the
computer is accessing the SD card slot.
DC IN
The DC IN indicator glows green when DC power
is supplied from the AC power adaptor. If the
adaptor’s output voltage is abnormal or if the
power supply malfunctions, this indicator flashes
orange.
Power
The Power indicator glows green when the
computer is on. If you select Standby from Shut
Down Windows, this indicator flashing (one
second on, two seconds off) while the computer
shuts down.
Battery
The Battery indicator shows the condition of the
battery’s charge: Green indicates full charge,
orange indicates battery charging and flashing
orange indicates a low battery charge. Refer to
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.
HDD
The HDD indicator glows green when the
computer is accessing the built-in hard disk drive.
Wireless
communication
The Wireless communication indicator glows
when the Bluetooth and wireless LAN functions
are turned on.
All models are provided with a Wireless
Communication switch although only some
models are equipped with both Wireless LAN
and Bluetooth functions.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Grand Tour
Keyboard indicators
The figures below show the positions of the keypad overlay indicators and
the Caps Lock indicator.
When the Arrow mode indicator glows the keypad overlay lets you control
the cursor.
When the Numeric mode indicator glows the keypad overlay lets you enter
numbers.
When the Caps Lock indicator glows the keyboard is in all-caps mode.
Caps Lock indicator
Figure 2-8 Caps Lock indicator
Caps Lock
This indicator glows green when the alphabet
keys are locked in uppercase.
Numeric
mode
Arrow mode
Figure 2-9 Keypad overlay indicators
Arrow mode
When the Arrow mode indicator lights green,
you can use the keypad overlay (gray labeled
keys) as cursor keys. Refer to the Keypad
overlay section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard.
Numeric mode
You can use the keypad overlay (gray labeled
keys) for numeric input when the Numeric mode
indicator lights green. Refer to the Keypad
overlay section in Chapter 5, The Keyboard.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-13
The Grand Tour
USB floppy disk drive
The USB floppy disk drive accommodates 1.44-megabyte or 720-kilobyte
floppy disk and connects to the USB port. It is supplied as standard with
some models and as an option with others.
USB connector
Disk-In-Use
Indicator
Floppy disk
slot
Eject button
Figure 2-10 USB floppy disk drive
USB connector
Insert this connector into one of the USB ports of
your computer.
Disk-In-Use Indicator This indicator lights when the floppy disk is being
accessed.
Floppy disk slot
Insert a floppy disk in this slot.
Eject button
When a floppy disk is fully seated in the drive, the
eject button pops out. To remove a floppy disk,
push in the eject button and the floppy disk pops
out partially for removal.
Check the Disk-In-Use indicator when you use the USB floppy disk drive.
Do not press the eject button or turn off the computer while the light is
glowing. Doing so could destroy data and damage the floppy disk or the
drive.
■ The USB floppy disk drive should be placed on a flat, horizontal surface
when in use. Do not set the drive on an incline 20° while it is operating.
■ Do not set anything on top of the floppy disk drive.
Downloaded
2-14
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Grand Tour
Optical disk drives
One of the following Optical disk drives is installed in the computer: CDROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW and DVD Super Multi drives. An
ATAPI interface controller is used for CD/DVD-ROM operation. When the
computer is accessing a CD/DVD, an indicator on the drive glows.
For information on loading and unloading discs refer to the Using optical
disk drives section in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Region codes for DVD drives and media
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW, DVD Super Multi drives and their associated media
are manufactured according to the specifications of six marketing regions.
When you purchase DVD-Video, make sure it matches your drive,
otherwise it will not play properly.
Code
Region
1
Canada, United States
2
Japan, Europe, South Africa, Middle East
3
Southeast Asia, East Asia
4
Australia, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, Central
America, South America, Caribbean
5
Russia, Indian Subcontinent, Africa, North Korea,
Mongolia
6
China
Writable discs
This section describes the types of writable CD/DVD discs. Check the
specifications for your drive to for the type of discs it can write. Use
RecordNow! to write compact discs. Refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
CDs
■ CD-R discs can be written only once. The recorded data cannot be
erased or changed.
■ CD-RW discs including multi speed CD-RW discs, high-speed CD-RW
discs and ultra-speed CD-RW discs can be recorded more than once.
DVDs
■ DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs can be written only
once. The recorded data cannot be erased or changed.
■ DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can be recorded more than
once.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-15
The Grand Tour
Formats
The drives support the following formats:
■ CD-ROM
■ DVD-ROM
■ CD-DA
■
■
■
TM
■ Photo CD (single/multi-session) ■
■
■ CD-ROM XA Mode 2 (Form1,
Form2)
DVD -Video
CD-Text
CD-ROM Mode 1, Mode 2
Enhanced CD (CD-EXTRA)
Addressing Method 2
CD-ROM drive
The full-size CD-ROM drive module lets you run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8
cm (3.15") CD without using an adaptor.
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer
edge.
CD read
24 speed (maximum)
DVD-ROM drive
The full-size DVD-ROM drive module lets you run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8
cm (3.15") CD/DVDs without using an adaptor.
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer
edge.
DVD read
8 speed (maximum)
CD read
24 speed (maximum)
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive
The full-size DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive module lets you record data to
rewritable CDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs
without using an adaptor.
The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer
edge.
DVD read
8 speed (maximum)
CD read
24 speed (maximum)
CD-R write
24 speed (maximum)
CD-RW write
24 speed (maximum, Ultra speed media)
Downloaded
2-16
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Grand Tour
DVD Super Multi drive
The full-size DVD Super Multi drive module lets you record data to
rewritable CDs as well as run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15") CD/DVDs
without using an adaptor.
■ The read speed is slower at the center of a disc and faster at the outer
edge.
DVD read
8 speed (maximum)
DVD-R write
8 speed (maximum)
DVD-RW write
4 speed (maximum)
DVD-R DL write
2 speed (maximum)
DVD+R write
8 speed (maximum)
DVD+R DL write
2.4 speed (maximum)
DVD+RW write
4 speed (maximum)
DVD-RAM write
5 speed (maximum)
CD read
24 speed (maximum)
CD-R write
24 speed (maximum)
CD-RW write
10 speed (maximum, Ultra-speed media)
2.6GB and 5.2GB DVD-RAM media cannot be read from or written to.
AC adaptor
The AC adaptor can automatically adjust to any voltage ranging from 100
to 240 volts and to a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz, enabling you to use
this computer in almost any country/region. The adaptor converts AC
power to DC power and reduces the voltage supplied to this computer.
To recharge the battery, simply connect the AC adaptor to a power source
and the computer. Refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes for
details.
Figure 2-11 The AC adaptor (2-pin plug)
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
2-17
The Grand Tour
Figure 2-12 The AC adaptor (3-pin plug)
■ Depending on the model, a 2-pin or 3-pin plug set of the above may be
bundled.
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this
region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform
to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.
Always use the TOSHIBA AC adaptor that was provided with your PC and
the TOSHIBA Battery Charger (that may have been provided with your
PC), or use AC adaptors and battery chargers specified by TOSHIBA to
avoid any risk of fire or other damage to the PC. Use of an incompatible
AC adaptor or Battery Charger could cause fire or damage to the PC
possibly resulting in serious injury.
Downloaded
2-18
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 3
Getting Started
This chapter provides basic information to get you started using your
computer. It covers the following topics:
■ Connecting the AC adaptor
■ Opening the display
■ Turning on the power
■ Starting up for the first time
■ Turning off the power
■ Restarting the computer
■ Creating recovery media
■ Restoring the preinstalled software from the Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
■ Restoring the preinstalled software from the Recovery Media
All users should be sure to read the section Starting up for the first time.
Information on VDT (Visual Display terminal) is described in the bundled
Safety manual.
Be sure to read the manual to help you be more comfortable and
productive while using a notebook computer. By following the
recommendations in this guide you may reduce your chance of developing
a painful or disabling injury to your hand, arms, shoulders or neck.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
3-1
Getting Started
Other Things to Note
■ Use a virus-check program and make sure it is updated regularly.
■ Never format storage media without checking its content. Formatting
destroys all stored data.
■ It is a good idea to periodically back up the internal hard disk or other
main storage device to external media. General storage media is not
durable or stable over long periods of time and under certain conditions
may result in data loss.
■ Before you install a device or application, save any data in memory to
the hard disk drive or other storage media. Failure to do so may result
in the loss of data.
Connecting the AC adaptor
Attach the AC adaptor when you need to charge the battery or you want to
operate from AC power. It is also the fastest way to get started, because
the battery pack will need to be charged before you can operate from
battery power.
The AC adaptor can be connected to any power source supplying from 100
to 240 volts and 50 or 60 hertz. For details on using the AC adaptor to
charge the battery pack, refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.
■ Always use the Toshiba AC adaptor that was provided with your PC
and the Toshiba Battery Charger (that may have been provided with
your PC), or use Toshiba recommended alternate models to avoid any
risk of fire or other damage to the PC. Use of an incompatible AC
adaptor or Battery Charger could cause fire or damage to the PC
possibly resulting in serious injury.
■ Use only the AC adaptor supplied with your computer or an equivalent
adaptor that is compatible. Use of any incompatible adaptor could
damage your computer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for any damage
caused by use of an incompatible adaptor.
■ Never plug the AC adaptor or Battery Charger into a power source that
does not correspond to both the voltage and the frequency specified on
the regulatory label of the unit. Failure to do so could result in a fire or
electric shock, possibly resulting in serious injury.
■ Always use or purchase power cables that comply with the legal
voltage and frequency specifications and requirements in the country
of use. Failure to do so could result in a fire or electric shock, possibly
resulting in serious injury.
Downloaded
3-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Getting Started
■ The supplied power cord conforms to safety rules and regulations in
the region the product is bought and should not be used outside this
region. For use in other regions, please buy power cords that conform
to safety rules and regulations in the particular region.
■ Do not use a 3-pin to 2-pin conversion plug.
■ When you connect the AC adaptor to the computer, always follow the
steps in the exact order as described in the User’s Manual. Connecting
the power cable to a live electrical outlet should be the last step
otherwise the adaptor DC output plug could hold an electrical change
and cause an electrical shock or minor bodily injury when touched. As
a general safety precaution, avoid touching any metal parts.
■ Never place your PC or AC adaptor on a wooden surface, furniture, or
any other surface that could be marred by exposure to heat since the
PC base and AC adaptor's surface increase in temperature during
normal use.
■ Always place your PC or AC adaptor on a flat and hard surface that is
resistant to heat damage.
1. Connect the power cord to the AC adaptor.
Figure 3-2 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (2-pin plug)
Figure 3-3 Connecting the power cord to the AC adaptor (3-pin plug)
Depending on the model, a 2-pin plug or 3-pin plug set of the above may
be bundled.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
3-3
Getting Started
2. Connect the AC adaptor’s DC output plug to the DC IN 15V jack on the
back of the computer.
DC IN jack
AC adaptor's DC
output plug
Figure 3-4 Connecting the adaptor to the computer
3. Plug the power cord into a live wall outlet. The Battery and DC IN
indicators on the front of the computer should glow.
Opening the display
The computer’s LCD display panel can be opened in a wide range of
angles for optimal viewing.
1. Slide the display latch on the front of the computer to unlatch the
display panel.
2. While holding down the palm rest with one hand so that the main body
is not raised, lift the panel slowly. Adjust the angle of the panel to
provide optimal clarity.
Use reasonable care when opening and closing the LCD display panel.
Opening it vigorously or slamming it shut could damage the computer.
LCD display panel
Display latch
Figure 3-5 Opening the LCD display panel
Downloaded
3-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Getting Started
Turning on the power
This section describes how to turn on the power.
The Power button LED indicates the status. Refer to the Power indicators
section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.
■ After you turn on the power for the first time, do not turn it off until you
have set up the operating system. Refer to the section Starting up for
the first time.
■ If the USB floppy disk drive is connected, make sure it is empty. If a
floppy disk is in the drive, press the eject button and remove the floppy
disk.
1. Open the computer’s LCD display panel.
2. Press and hold the computer’s power button for two or three seconds.
Power button
Figure 3-6 Turning on the power
Starting up for the first time
When you first turn on the power, the computer’s initial screen is the
Microsoft Windows XP Startup Screen Logo. Follow the on-screen
directions for each screen. During setup, you can click the Back button to
return to the previous screen.
Be sure to read the Windows End User License Agreement display
carefully.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
3-5
Getting Started
Turning off the power
The power can be turned off in one of the following modes: Shut down
(Boot), Hibernation or Standby Mode.
Shut Down mode (Boot mode)
When you turn off the power in Shut Down mode no data is saved and the
computer will boot to the operating system’s main screen.
1. If you have entered data, save it to the hard disk or to a storage media.
2. Make sure all disk (disc) activity has stopped, then remove the CD/
DVDs or floppy disk.
■ Make sure the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) is off. If you turn off the power
while a disk (disc) is being accessed, you can lose data or damage the
disk (disc).
■ Never turn off the power while an application is running. Doing so could
cause loss of data.
■ Never turn off the power, disconnect an external storage device or
remove storage media during data read/write. Doing so can cause data
loss.
3. Click start then click Turn Off Computer. From the Turn Off
Computer menu select Turn Off.
4. Turn off the power to any peripheral devices.
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment
to let all capacitors fully discharge.
Standby Mode
If you have to interrupt your work, you can turn off the power without exiting
from your software. Data is maintained in the computer’s main memory.
When you turn on the power again, you can continue working right where
you left off.
■ When the AC adaptor is connected, the computer will go into Standby
Mode according to the settings in the TOSHIBA Power Saver utility.
■ To restore operation from Standby Mode, press the power button or
press any key. The latter action only works on the internal keyboard if
the Wake-up on Keyboard option is enabled in HW Setup.
■ If the computer automatically enters Standby Mode while a network
application is active, the application might not be restored when the
computer wakes up from Standby.
■ To prevent the computer from automatically entering Standby Mode,
disable Standby in TOSHIBA Power Saver. That action, however, will
nullify the computer’s Energy Star compliance.
Downloaded
3-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Getting Started
■ Before entering Standby Mode, be sure to save your data.
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in
Standby Mode. The computer or the module could be damaged.
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby Mode
(unless the computer is connected to an AC power source). Data in
memory will be lost.
■ If you carry the computer on board an aircraft or into a hospital, be sure
to shut down the computer in Hibernation Mode or in shutdown mode
to avoid radio signal interference.
Benefits of standby
The standby feature provides the following benefits:
■ Restores the previous working environment more rapidly than does
hibernation.
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives
no input or hardware access for the duration set by the System Standby
feature.
■ You can use the panel power off feature.
Executing standby
You can also enable Standby by pressing Fn + F3. See Chapter 5, The
Keyboard, for details.
You can enter Standby Mode in one of three ways:
1. Click start, click Turn Off Computer and click Stand By.
2. Close the computer’s LCD display panel. This feature must be enabled.
Refer to the Setup Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility
described in the Control Panel.
Open Performance and Maintenance and open TOSHIBA Power
Saver.
3. Press the power button. This feature must be enabled. Refer to the
Setup Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver Utility described in the
Control Panel.
Open Performance and Maintenance and open TOSHIBA Power
Saver.
When you turn the power back on, you can continue where you left when
you shut down the computer.
■ When the computer is shut down in Standby Mode, the power indicator
blinking orange.
■ If you are operating the computer on battery power, you can lengthen
the operating time by shutting down in Hibernation Mode. Standby
Mode consumes more power.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
3-7
Getting Started
Standby limitations
Standby will not function under the following conditions:
■ Power is turned back on immediately after shutting down.
■ Memory circuits are exposed to static electricity or electrical noise.
Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation Mode feature saves the contents of memory to the hard
disk when the computer is turned off. The next time the computer is turned
on, the previous state is restored. The Hibernation Mode feature does not
save the status of any peripheral devices.
■ Save your data. While entering Hibernation Mode, the computer saves
the contents of memory to the hard disk drive. However, for safety
sake, it is best to save your data manually.
■ Data will be lost if you remove the battery or disconnect the AC adaptor
before the save is completed. Wait for the HDD indicator to go out.
■ Do not install or remove a memory module while the computer is in
Hibernation Mode. Data will be lost.
Benefits of Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation Mode feature provides the following benefits:
■ Saves data to the hard disk when the computer automatically shuts
down because of a low battery.
For the computer to shut down in Hibernation Mode, this feature must be
enabled in two places: the Hibernate tab in Power Options and Setup
Actions tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
If you do not configure this feature, the computer will shut down in Standby
Mode - if battery power becomes depleted, data saved in Standby Mode
will be lost.
■ You can return to your previous working environment immediately when
you turn on the computer.
■ Saves power by shutting down the system when the computer receives
no input or hardware access for the duration set by the System
hibernate feature.
■ You can use the panel power off feature.
Starting Hibernation Mode
You can also enable Hibernation Mode by pressing Fn + F4. Refer to
Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.
To enter Hibernation Mode, follow the steps below.
1. Click start.
2. Select Turn Off Computer.
3. Open the Turn Off Computer dialog box.
Downloaded
3-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Getting Started
4. Click Hibernate.
Automatic Hibernation
The computer will enter Hibernate mode automatically when you press the
power button or close the lid. First, however, make the appropriate settings
according to the steps below.
1. Click start and open the Control Panel.
2. Open Performance and Maintenance and open Power Options.
3. Select the Hibernate window in the Power Options Properties,
select the Enable hibernation check box and click the Apply button.
4. Open TOSHIBA Power Saver.
5. Select the Setup Action window.
6. Enable the desired Hibernation settings for When I press the power
button and When I close the lid.
7. Click the OK button.
Data save in Hibernation Mode
When you turn off the power in Hibernation Mode, the computer takes a
moment to save current memory data to the hard disk. During this time, the
HDD indicator will light.
After you turn off the computer, and the content of memory has been saved
to the hard disk, turn off the power to any peripheral devices.
Do not turn the computer or devices back on immediately. Wait a moment
to let all capacitors fully discharge.
Restarting the computer
Certain conditions require that you reset the system. For example, if:
■ You change certain computer settings.
■ An error occurs and the computer does not respond to your keyboard
commands.
■ There are three ways to reset the computer system:
1. Click start then click Turn off computer. From the Turn off
computer menu select Restart.
2. Press Ctrl + Alt + Del to display the Windows Task Manager, then
select Shut Down and Restart.
3. Press the power button and hold it down for five seconds. Wait 10 to 15
seconds, then turn the power on again by pressing the power button.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
3-9
Getting Started
Create Optical Recovery Discs
A recovery image of your computer is stored on the hard disk. You may use
this image to create CD or DVD recovery discs using the following steps:
1. Select either blank CDs or DVD media.
2. The application will allow you to choose a type of media to create
recovery CDs/DVD including: CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+R DL and DVD+RW.
Some media may not be compatible with the optical disk drive of your
computer. Please verify your optical disk drive supports the blank media
you choose.
3. Turn on your computer without a PC card storage device such as Hard
Disk Drive (HDD) to open Windows XP.
4. Insert the (first) blank media into the tray of the optical disk drive.
5. Double click the Recovery Disc Creator icon on the Windows XP
desktop, or select the application from start Menu.
6. After Recovery Disc Creator starts, select the type of media and the title
you wish to copy to the media then click the Burn button.
If your optical disk drive can only write to CDs, select "CD" as the "Type"
on Recovery Disc Creator. If your optical disk drive of your computer can
write to either CD or DVDs, select the one you are using as the "Type" on
Recovery Disc Creator.
Restoring the preinstalled software from the
Recovery HDD
About 2.5GB of hard disk space is reserved for recovery partition.
When re-setting up your hard disk, do not change, delete or add partitions
in a manner other than specified in the manual. Otherwise, space for
software may be destroyed.
In addition, if you use a third-party partitioning program to reconfigure
partitions on your hard disk, it may become impossible to re-setup your
computer.
When sound mute is turned ON by the Fn + Esc key, turn OFF before
starting restore. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.
1. Turn off your computer.
2. While holding down 0 (zero) key on the keyboard, turn on your
computer.
3. A Menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions
Downloaded
3-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Getting Started
Restoring the preinstalled software from your
creating Recovery Media
If preinstalled files are damaged, you can either use the Recovery Media
you have created or the hard disk drive recovery to restore them. To
restore the operating system and all preinstalled software, follow the steps
below.
When sound mute is turned ON by the Fn + Esc key, turn OFF before
starting restore. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard, for details.
When you reinstall the Windows operating system, the hard disk will be
reformatted and all data will be lost.
1. Load the Recovery Media in the optional optical disk drive and turn off
the computer’s power.
2. Hold down the F12 key and turn on the power. When In Touch with
Tomorrow TOSHIBA appears, release the F12 key.
3. Use the left or right cursor key to select the CD-ROM icon in the display
menu. For details, refer to the Boot Priority section in Chapter 7, HW
Setup.
4. A menu appears, follow the on-screen instructions.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
3-11
Getting Started
Downloaded
3-12
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 4
Operating Basics
This chapter describes the basic operations of your computer and
precautions when using it, as well as the handling of CD/DVD.
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device
The computer is equipped with a dual point system: a Touch Pad and an
AccuPoint pointing stick.
Using the Touch Pad
To use the Touch Pad, simply touch and move your fingertip across it in the
direction you want the on-screen pointer to go.
AccuPoint
Fingerprint
Sensor
AccuPoint
control buttons
Touch Pad
control buttons
Touch Pad
Figure 4-1 Touch Pad and Touch Pad control buttons
Two buttons below the Touch Pad are used like the buttons on a mouse
pointer. Press the left button to select a menu item or to manipulate text or
graphics designated by the pointer. Press the right button to display a
menu or other function depending on the software you are using.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-1
Operating Basics
You can also tap the Touch Pad to perform functions similar to those of the
left button.
Click: Tap once
Double-click: Tap twice
Drag and drop: Tap to select the material you want to move. Leave
your finger on the Touch Pad after the second tap and move the
material.
Using the AccuPoint
To use the AccuPoint, simply push it with your finger tip in the direction you
want to move the on-screen pointer.
Two buttons above the Touch Pad work in the same way with the
AccuPoint as they do with the Touch Pad. Refer to the Using the Touch
Pad section for details.
AccuPoint precautions
Certain conditions can affect the on-screen pointer when using AccuPoint.
For example, the pointer may travel contrary to AccuPoint operation or an
error message may appear, if
■ You touch the AccuPoint during power-up.
■ You apply constant, soft pressure during power-up.
■ There is a sudden temperature change.
■ Strong stress is applied to the AccuPoint.
If an error message appears, reboot the computer. If an error message
does not appear, wait a moment for the pointer to stop, then continue
operation.
Replacing the cap
The AccuPoint cap is an expendable item that should be replaced after
prolonged use. The spare AccuPoint cap is supplied with the computer.
1. To remove the AccuPoint cap, firmly pinch the cap and pull it straight
up.
AccuPoint cap
Figure 4-2 Removing the AccuPoint cap
Downloaded
4-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
2. Position a new cap on the peg and press it into place.
The peg is square, so be careful to align the cap’s square hole with the
peg.
Using the Fingerprint Sensor
This product has a fingerprint utility installed for the purpose of enrolling
and recognizing fingerprints. By enrolling the ID and password onto the
fingerprint authentication feature, it is no longer necessary to input the
password from the keyboard. Fingerprint feature enables you to:
■ Logon to Windows and access a security-enabled homepage through
IE (Internet Explorer).
■ Files and folders can be encrypted/decrypted and third party access to
them prevented.
■ Disable the password-protected screen-saver when returning from
power-saving (e.g. standby) mode.
■ Authentication of the User Password (and, if applicable, HDD (Hard
Disk Drive) Password) when booting up the computer.(Power-on
Security)
■ Single Sign-on feature
Fingerprint cannot be used in models that do not have a fingerprint module
installed.
Points to note about the Fingerprint Sensor
Failure to follow these guidelines might result in (1) damage to the sensor
or cause sensor failure, (2) finger recognition problems, or lower finger
recognition success rate.
■ Do not scratch or poke the sensor with your nails or any hard or sharp
objects.
■ Do not press the sensor strongly.
■ Do not touch the sensor with a wet finger or any wet objects. Keep
sensor surface dry and free of water vapour.
■ Do not touch the sensor with a soiled finger. Minute foreign particles on
a soiled or dirty finger may scratch the sensor.
■ Do not paste stickers or write on the sensor.
■ Do not touch the sensor with a finger or any object with built-up static
electricity.
Observe the following before you place your finger on the sensor whether
for fingerprint enrollment/registration or recognition.
■ Wash and dry your hands thoroughly.
■ Remove static electricity from your fingers by touching any metal
surface. Static electricity is a common cause of sensor failures,
especially when the weather is dry.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-3
Operating Basics
■ Clean the sensor with a lint-free cloth. Do not use detergent to clean the
sensor.
■ Avoid the following finger conditions for enrollment or recognition as
they may result in fingerprint enrollment errors or a drop in the
fingerprint recognition success rate
■ Soaked or swollen finger (e.g. after taking bath)
■ Injured finger
■ Wet finger
■ Soiled or oily finger
■ Extremely dry skin condition on finger
Observe the following to improve the fingerprint recognition success rate.
■ Enroll two or more fingers.
■ Enroll additional fingers if recognition failure occurs often using enrolled
fingers.
■ Check your finger condition. Changed conditions, such as injured,
rough, extremely dry, wet, soiled, dirty, oily, soaked, swollen fingers,
may lower the recognition success rate. Also if the fingerprint is worn
down or the finger becomes thinner or fatter, the recognition success
rate may be lowered.
■ The fingerprint for each finger is different and unique. Please ensure
that only the registered or enrolled fingerprint or fingerprints are used
for identification.
■ Check sliding position and speed (see the drawing bellow).
How to Delete the Fingerprint Data
Saved fingerprint data is stored in non-volatile memory inside the
fingerprint sensor. If you hand over the computer to others, or dispose of it,
it is recommended that you perform the following operations.
1. Click start, point to All Programs, point to Protector Suite QL and
click Control Center.
2. The Protector Suite Software screen is displayed.
3. Click Fingerprints and click Delete.
4. Click Settings and click Fingerprint Storage Inspector.
5. The Fingerprint Storage Inspector screen is displayed. If other
fingerprint data is still displayed on the list, select all fingerprint data
and click remove.
6. Check whether all fingerprint data was deleted on the fingerprint
Storage inspector screen.
Downloaded
4-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
Fingerprint Sensor Limitations
■ The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the unique
characteristics in a fingerprint.
■ A warning message will be displayed when recognition is abnormal or
recognition is not successful within a fixed duration.
■ The recognition success rate may differ from user to user.
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that this fingerprint recognition technology
will be error-free.
■ Toshiba does not guarantee that the fingerprint sensor will recognize
the enrolled user or accurately screen out unauthorized users at all
times. Toshiba is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise
out of the use of this fingerprint recognition software or utility.
The following illustrations show the recommended way to swipe your finger
over the recognition sensor.
Align your fingertip with the sensor as shown in the illustrations and Swipe.
Points to note about the Fingerprint Utility
Backups for saved fingerprint data and saved information in the
PasswordBank can be performed in Import or Export User Data under
Fingerprint Software Management. However, encrypted files cannot be
backuped within Mysafe with this function. Recommended action is
backing up encrypted files to external media with standard methods such
as copying files.
If Windows XP’s file encryption function EFS (Encryption File System) is
used to encrypt a file, the file cannot be further encrypted using the
encryption function of this software.
If the fingerprint sensor and Trusted Platform Module (TPM) security are
used as identification devices, install and configure the Infineon TPM
Professional package first before configuring the fingerprint utility. Please
refer to the TPM (Trusted Platform Module) Installation Guide for the
installation and configuration methods for TPM.
In the help file, it is stated that this software's PasswordBank function can
be used for the Internet and general applications. However, the Internet
PasswordBank function in the fingerprint utility provided in this computer
can only be used with IE (Internet Explorer).
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-5
Operating Basics
Set Up Procedure
Please use the following procedure when first using fingerprint
authentication.
Fingerprint Registration
Enroll the required authentication data using the "User Enrollment" Wizard.
■ The fingerprint authentication uses the same Windows logon ID and
password. If the Windows logon password has not been setup, please
do so before registration.
■ Up to 21 fingerprint patterns can be registered on this sensor.
1. Click start, point to All Programs, point to Protector Suite QL and
click User Enrollment Wizard.
You can also start User Enrollment Wizard using the following method.
■ Click the Protector Suite QL icon in the Task Bar.
■ Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor.
2. Click Next.
3. The User’s Password screen is displayed. Ensure the same Windows
logon user name is displayed before entering a password into the Enter
your password field. Click Next.
4. The Hints for Fingerprint Enrollment screen is displayed.
Confirm the message and that there is a checkmark in Run Interactive
Tutorial, and click Next.
5. The Correct Swipe Procedure screen is displayed.
Confirm the message and click Next.
6. The Scanning Practice screen is displayed.
You can practice swiping your finger When you have finished practicing
swiping your finger, click Next.
7. The User’s Fingers screen is displayed.
Based on the illustration, after selecting the finger to be registered,
“Swipe Finger” dialog box will be displayed; swipe the finger to be
registered three times.
If registration is successful, a fingerprint mark will appear above the
registered finger in the illustration.
To register another finger, select that finger and repeat the registration
process.
To end the fingerprint registration process, click Next.
8. The Advanced Security screen is displayed.
Select whether to enable the security function, and click Next.
9. The Finalization screen is displayed. Click Finish. This completes the
fingerprint registration process.
Window Logon via Fingerprint Authentication
In place of the usual Windows logon by ID and password, fingerprint
authentication also allows logon to Windows.
Downloaded
4-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
This is useful especially when many users are using the same computer as
it allows the user selection screen to be skipped.
Fingerprint Authentication Procedure
1. Start up the computer.
2. The Logon Authorization screen is displayed. Choose any of the
enrolled fingers and swipe the fingerprint on the sensor.
If authentication is successful, the user will be logged on to Windows.
If the fingerprint authentication fails, please logon using the Windows logon
password.
Please logon using the Windows logon password if the fingerprint
authentication failed for three consecutive tries. To logon using the
Windows logon password, enter the Windows logon password at the
"Welcome" screen as normal.
A warning message will be displayed when authentication is abnormal or
authentication is not successful within a fixed duration.
Fingerprint Power-on Security
General
The fingerprint authentication system can be used to replace the keyboardbased User/BIOS Password authentication system when booting up.
If you do not want to use the fingerprint authentication system for password
authentication when booting up, but prefer to use the keyboard-based
system instead, press the BkSP (backspace) key when the Fingerprint
Power-on Security screen is displayed. This will switch the password input
screen to the keyboard-based one.
■ It is necessary to register the User Password before using the
Fingerprint Power-on Security and its extended function, the
Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature. Please use TOSHIBA Password
Utility to register the User Password.
■ If you fail fingerprint authentication more than five times, you must
enter the User Password or Supervisor Password manually to start the
computer.
■ When swiping, please do it slowly and at a constant speed. If this does
not improve the authentication rate, please adjust the speed.
■ If there are any changes in the environment or settings related to
authorization, you will be required to provide authorization information
such as a User Password (and, if applicable, HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
password).
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-7
Operating Basics
How to Enable Fingerprint Power-on Security Settings
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Protector Suite QL
application prior to enabling and configuring the Fingerprint Power-on
Security System. Check that your fingerprint is enrolled before configuring
the settings. See Manual for Fingerprint Registration/Enrollment
instructions.
1. Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor.
2. MENU appears in the lower right corner of the screen. Swipe your
finger on the Fingerprint Sensor, and select Control Center from the
MENU items.
3. The Fingerprint Software Management screen is displayed. Click
Settings and click Power-on Security.
4. The Power-on Security screen is displayed. Place a checkmark in the
place the power-on and hard drive passwords with the fingerprint
reader and click OK.
Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature
General
This is a feature that allows the user to complete the authentication for both
the User/BIOS Password (and optionally, HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
Password) and logging on to Windows using only one fingerprint
authentication when booting up. It is necessary to register the User/BIOS
Password and Windows Logon password before using the Fingerprint
Power-on Security and this Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature. Please use
TOSHIBA Password Utility to register your User/BIOS Password. If
Windows Logon is not the default for your system, see Manual to register
your Windows Logon password.
Only one fingerprint authentication is required to replace the User/BIOS
Password (and optionally, HDD (Hard Disk Drive) Password) and Windows
Logon password.
How to Enable Fingerprint Single Sign-on Feature
It is necessary to first enroll your fingerprint with the Protector Suite QL
application prior to enabling and configuring the How to Enable Fingerprint
Single Sign-on Feature. Check that the fingerprint is enrolled before
configuring the settings. See Manual for Fingerprint Registration/
Enrollment instructions.
1. Swipe your finger across the Fingerprint Sensor.
2. MENU appears in the lower right corner of the screen. Swipe your
finger on the Fingerprint Sensor, and select Control Center from the
MENU items.
3. The Fingerprint Software Management screen is displayed.
Click Settings and click System Settings.
4. The Protector Suite Settings screen is displayed. Place a checkmark
in Allow power-on security single sign-on within Enable logon support
and click OK.
Downloaded
4-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
Fingerprint utility limitations
TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the Fingerprint utility technology will be
completely secure or error-free. TOSHIBA does not guarantee that the
Fingerprint utility will accurately screen out unauthorized users at all times.
TOSHIBA is not liable for any failure or damage that might arise out of the
use of the fingerprint software or utility.
How to Swipe the Finger
Using the following steps when swiping fingers for fingerprint registration or
authentication will help to minimize authentication failures:
1. Align the first joint of the finger to the center of the sensor. Lightly touch
the sensor and swipe finger levelly towards you.
While lightly touching the sensor, swipe the finger towards you until the
sensor surface becomes visible.
Ensure the center of the fingerprint is on the sensor when swiping the
finger.
■ Avoid swiping with the finger stiff or pressed-on too hard.
Fingerprint reading may fail if the center of the fingerprint is not
touching on the sensor, or when finger is swiped while pressing hard.
Make sure that the center of the fingerprint is touching the sensor
before swiping.
■ Confirm the center of the fingerprint whirl before swiping.
Always confirm the center of the fingerprint whirl so that it is swiped
along the center line of the sensor.
■ When fingerprint reading is not successful.
There is a possibility of authentication failures if the finger is swiped too
quickly or too slowly. Follow the onscreen instructions to adjust the
speed of the swipe.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-9
Operating Basics
Using the USB floppy disk drive
The USB floppy disk drive accommodates 1.44-megabyte or 720-kilobyte
floppy disk and connects to the USB port. Refer to Chapter 2, The Grand
Tour, for more information. It is supplied as standard with some models and
as an option with others.
Connecting USB floppy disk drive
To connect the drive, plug the floppy disk drive’s USB connector into a
computer’s USB port. Refer to Figure 4-3.
Make sure the connector is right side up and properly aligned with the
socket. Do not try to force the connection, doing so can damage the
connecting pins.
USB port
USB connector
Figure 4-3 Connecting the USB floppy disk drive
If you connect the USB floppy disk drive after turning on the computer, it
will take about 10 seconds for the computer to recognize the drive. Do not
disconnect and reconnect before 10 seconds has elapsed.
Disconnecting USB floppy disk drive
When you have finished using the USB floppy disk drive, follow the
procedures below to disconnect it:
1. Wait for the indicator light to go out to make sure all floppy disk activity
has stopped.
If you disconnect the USB floppy disk drive or turn off the power while the
computer is accessing the drive you may lose data or damage the floppy
disk or the drive.
2. Click the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.
3. Click USB floppy disk drive device that you want remove.
4. Pull the floppy disk drive’s USB connector out of the computer’s USB
port.
Downloaded
4-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
Using optical disk drives
The text and illustrations in this section refer primarily to the optical disk
drive.The full-size drive provides high-performance execution of CD/DVDROM-based programs. You can run either 12 cm (4.72") or 8 cm (3.15")
CD/DVDs without an adaptor. An ATAPI interface controller is used for CD/
DVD-ROM operation. When the computer is accessing a CD/DVD-ROM,
an indicator on the drive glows.
Use the WinDVD application to view DVD-Video discs.
If you have a DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive, refer also to the Writing CDs on
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive section for precautions on writing to CDs.
If you have a DVD Super Multi drive, refer also to the Writing CD/DVDs on
DVD Super Multi drive section for precautions on writing to CDs/DVDs.
Loading discs
To load CD/DVDs, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-4 to 4-7.
1. When the computer’s power is on, press the eject button to open
the disc tray slightly.
Eject button
Figure 4-4 Pressing the eject button
2. Grasp the disc tray gently and pull until it is fully opened.
Disc tray
Figure 4-5 Pulling the disc tray open
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-11
Operating Basics
3. Lay the CD/DVD, label side up, in the disc tray.
Laser lens
Figure 4-6 Inserting a CD/DVD
When the disc tray is fully opened, the edge of the computer will extend
slightly over the CD/DVD tray. Therefore, you will need to turn the CD/DVD
at an angle when you place it in the disc tray. After seating the CD/DVD,
however, make sure it lies flat, as shown in figure 4-5.
■ Do not touch a laser lens and its circumference portion. Doing so could
cause misalignment.
■ Prevent foreign objects from entering the drive. Check the surface of
the disc tray, especially the area behind the front edge of the disc tray,
to make sure there are no such objects before closing the drive.
4. Press gently at the center of the CD/DVD until you feel it click into
place. The CD/DVD should lie below the top of the spindle, flush with
the spindle base.
Downloaded
4-12
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
5. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into
place.
If the CD/DVD is not seated properly when the disc tray is closed, the CD/
DVD might be damaged. Also, the disc tray might not open fully when you
press the eject button.
Figure 4-7 Closing the CD/DVD disc tray
Removing discs
To remove the CD/DVD, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-10.
Do not press the eject button while the computer is accessing the media
drive. Wait for the optical disk indicator to go out before you open the disc
tray. Also, if the CD/DVD is spinning when you open the disc tray, wait for
it to stop before you remove it.
1. To pop the disc tray partially open, press the eject button. Gently pull
the disc tray out until it is fully opened.
When the disc tray pops open slightly, wait a moment to make sure the
CD/DVD has stopped spinning before pulling the disc tray fully open.
2. The CD/DVD extends slightly over the sides of the disc tray so you can
hold it. Hold the CD/DVD gently and lift it out.
Figure 4-8 Removing a CD/DVD
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-13
Operating Basics
3. Push the center of the disc tray to close it. Press gently until it locks into
place.
How to remove CD/DVD when the disc tray will not open
Pressing the eject button will not open the disc tray when the computer
power is off. If the power is off, you can open the disc tray by inserting a
slender object (about 15 mm) such as a straightened paper clip into the
eject hole just to the right of the eject button.
15mm
Eject hole
Figure 4-9 Manual release with the eject hole
Turn off the power before you use the eject hole. If the CD/DVD is spinning
when you open the disc tray, the CD/DVD could fly off the spindle and
cause injury.
Writing CDs on DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive
Depending on the type of drive installed, you may be able to write CDs. The
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive lets you write as well as read CD-ROMs.
Observe the precautions in this section to ensure the best performance for
writing CDs. For information on loading and unloading CDs refer to the
Using optical disk drives section.
■ Refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for details about the types of
writable CD/DVD discs.
Downloaded
4-14
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
When writing to media using an optical drive, always connect the AC
adaptor to a power plug socket or power source to ensure maximum
performance. If data is written powered by the batteries, writing may
sometimes fail due to low battery power and data loss may occur.
Before writing or rewriting
Please observe the following points when you write or rewrite the data.
■ We recommend the following manufacturers of CD-R and CD-RW
media. Media quality can affect write or rewrite success rates.
CD-R:
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
Multi-Speed and High-Speed CD-RW:
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
Ultra-Speed CD-RW:
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
TOSHIBA has confirmed the operation of CD-R and CD-RW media of the
manufacturers above. Operation of other media cannot be guaranteed.
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW is affected by the quality of the
disc and the way it is used.
■ Be sure to connect the AC adaptor when you write or rewrite.
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the writing
software.
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver which can put a heavy load
on the CPU.
■ Operate the computer at full power. Do not use power-saving features.
■ Do not write while virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish,
then disable virus detection programs including any software that
checks files automatically in the background.
■ Do not use hard disk utilities, including those intended to enhance hard
disk drive access speeds. They may cause unstable operation and
damage data.
■ Write from the computer's hard disk drive to the CD. Do not try to write
from shared devices such as a LAN server or any other network device.
■ Writing with software other than Sonic RecordNow! has not been
confirmed. Therefore, operation with other software cannot be
guaranteed.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-15
Operating Basics
When writing or rewriting
Note the following when you write or rewrite a CD-R or CD-RW.
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical media. Do not
use cut-and-paste as the original data will be lost if there is a write error.
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:
■ Change users in the Windows XP operating system.
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including use of a
mouse or Touch Pad, closing/opening the LCD panel.
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including the following:
PC card, SD card, USB devices, external monitor, i.LINK devices,
optical digital devices.
■ Open the optical disk drive.
■ Make sure writing or rewriting is completed before going into standby/
hibernation. Writing is completed if you can open the CDs on DVDROM&CD-R/RW drive tray.
■ If the media is poor in quality, dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting
errors may occur.
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to
vibration such as airplanes, trains or cars. Do not use an unstable
surface such as a stand.
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away
from the computer.
Writing CD/DVDs on DVD Super Multi drive
You can use the DVD Super Multi drive to write data to either CD-R/RW or
DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW/-RAM discs. The following applications
for writing are provided: RecordNow!, and DLA licensed by Sonic
Solutions, and InterVideo’s WinDVD Creator Platinum.
■ Refer to the Writable discs, Chapter 2 for details about the types of
writable CD/DVD discs.
When writing to media using an optical drive, always connect the AC
adaptor to a power plug socket or power source to ensure maximum
performance. If data is written powered by the batteries, writing may
sometimes fail due to low battery power and data loss may occur.
Downloaded
4-16
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
Important message
Before you write or rewrite to CD-R/RW or DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/
+RW/-RAM discs, read and follow all setup and operating instructions in
this section. If you fail to do so, the DVD Super Multi drive may not function
properly, and you may fail to write or rewrite, lose data or incur other
damage.
Disclaimers
TOSHIBA does not bear responsibility for the following:
■ Damage to any CD-R/RW or DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW/-RAM
disc that may be caused by writing or rewriting with this product.
■ Any change or loss of the recorded contents of CD-R/RW or DVD-R/-R
DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/+RW/-RAM disc that may be caused by writing or
rewriting with this product, or for any business profit loss or business
interruption that may be caused by the change or loss of the recorded
contents.
■ Damage that may be caused by using third party equipment or
software.
Given the technological limitations of current optical disc writing drives, you
may experience unexpected writing or rewriting errors due to disc quality or
problems with hardware devices. Also, it is a good idea to make two or
more copies of important data, in case of undesired change or loss of the
recorded contents.
Before writing or rewriting
■ Based on TOSHIBA's limited compatibility testing, we suggest the
following manufacturers of CD-R/RW or DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/+R/+R DL/
+RW/-RAM disc. However, in no event does TOSHIBA guarantee the
operation, quality or performance of any disc. Disc quality can affect
write or rewrite success rates.
CD-R:
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
CD-RW: (Multi-Speed and High-Speed)
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
CD-RW: (Ultra-Speed)
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-17
Operating Basics
DVD-R:
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for General Version 2.0
TAIYO YUDEN CO., LTD.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
DVD-R DL:
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION.
DVD+R:
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
DVD+R DL:
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
DVD-RW:
DVD Specifications for Recordable Disc for Version 1.1 or version
1.2
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN.LIMITED
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
DVD+RW:
MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
RICOH Co., Ltd.
DVD-RAM:
DVD Specifications for DVD-RAM Disc for Version 2.0, Version 2.1
or Version 2.2
Hitachi Maxell Ltd.
This drive cannot use discs that allow writing faster than16 speed (DVD-R,
DVD+R), 4 speed (DVD-RW, DVD+RW), 5 speed (DVD-RAM), 4 speed
(DVD-R DL) and 8 speed (DVD+R DL).
■ If the disc is poor in quality, dirty or damaged, writing or rewriting errors
may occur. Be careful to check the disc for dirt or damage before you
use it.
■ The actual number of rewrites to CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVDRAM is affected by the quality of the disc and the way it is used.
■ DISC created in DVD-R DL format4 (Layer Jump Recording) cannot be
read.
■ There are two types of DVD-R discs: authoring and general use discs.
Do not use authoring discs. Only general use discs can be written to by
a computer drive.
Downloaded
4-18
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
■ You can use DVD-RAM discs that can be removed from a cartridge and
DVD-RAM discs designed without a cartridge.
■ Other DVD-ROM drives for computers or other DVD players may not be
able to read DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs.
■ Data written to a CD-R/DVD-R-R DL/DVD+R/+R DL disc cannot be
deleted either in whole or in part.
■ Data deleted (erased) from a CD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW and DVDRAM disc cannot be recovered. Check the content of the disc carefully
before you delete it. If multiple drives that can write data to discs are
connected, be careful not to delete data from the wrong drive.
■ In writing to a DVD-R/-R DL/-RW, DVD+R/+R DL/+RW or DVD-RAM
disc, some disc space is required for file management, so you may not
be able to write the full capacity of the disc.
■ Since the disc is based on the DVD standard, it might be filled with
dummy data if the written data is less than about 1 GB. Even if you write
only a small amount of data, it might take time to fill in the dummy data.
■ DVD-RAM formatted by FAT32 cannot be read in Windows 2000
without DVD-RAM Driver Software.
■ When multiple drives that can write data to discs are connected, be Be
sure to connect the AC adaptor before you write or rewrite.
■ Before you enter standby/Hibernation Mode, be sure to finish DVDRAM writing. Writing is finished if you can eject DVD-RAM media.
■ Be sure to close all other software programs except the writing
software.
■ Do not run software such as a screen saver, which can put a heavy load
on the CPU.
■ Operate the computer in the full-power mode. Do not use power-saving
features.careful not to write to the wrong drive.
■ Do not write while virus check software is running. Wait for it to finish
and then disable virus detection programs including any software that
checks files automatically in the background.
■ Do not use hard disk utilities, including those intended to enhance hard
disk drive access speed. They may cause unstable operation and data
damage.
■ CD-RW (Ultra Speed +) media is not available. If used, data may be lost
or damaged.
■ Write from the computer’s hard disk drive to the CD/DVD. Do not try to
write from shared devices such as a LAN server or any other network
device.
■ Writing with software other than RecordNow! and InterVideo WinDVD
Creator Platinum are not recommended.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-19
Operating Basics
When writing or rewriting
Please observe/consider the following when you write or rewrite to a CD-R/
-RW, DVD-R/-R DL/-RW/-RAM or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW disc.
■ Do not perform any of the following actions when writing or rewriting:
■ Change users in the Windows XP operating system.
■ Operate the computer for any other function, including using a
mouse or Touch Pad or closing/opening the LCD panel.
■ Start a communication application such as a modem.
■ Apply impact or vibration to the computer.
■ Install, remove or connect external devices, including the following:
PC card, SD card, USB devices, external monitor, i.LINK devices,
optical digital devices.
■ Use the Audio/Video control button to reproduce music or voice.
■ Open the optical disk drive.
■ Do not use shut down/log off and standby/hibernation while writing or
rewriting.
■ Make sure writing or rewriting is completed before going into standby/
hibernation. Writing is completed if you can open the DVD Super Multi
drive tray.
■ Set the computer on a level surface and avoid places subject to
vibration such as airplanes, trains, or cars. Do not use an unstable
surface such as a stand.
■ Keep mobile phones and other wireless communication devices away
from the computer.
■ Always copy data from the hard disk drive to the optical media. Do not
use cut-and-paste. The original data will be lost if there is a write error.
DISC created in DVD-R DL format4 (Layer Jump Recording) cannot be
read.
RecordNow! Basic for TOSHIBA
Note the following limitations when you use RecordNow!:
■ DVD-Video cannot be created using RecordNow!.
■ DVD-Audio cannot be created using RecordNow!.
■ You cannot use RecordNow!'s “Audio CD for Car or Home CD Player”
function to record music to the DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/
+RW discs.
■ Do not use the “Exact Copy” function of RecordNow! to copy DVDVideo and DVD-ROM with copyright protection.
■ DVD-RAM disc cannot be backed up with the “Exact Copy” function of
RecordNow!.
■ You cannot back up a CD-ROM or CD-R/RW to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW using the “Exact Copy” function of RecordNow!.
Downloaded
4-20
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
■ You cannot back up DVD-ROM, DVD-Video, DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW to CD-R/RW using the “Exact Copy” function of
RecordNow!.
■ RecordNow! cannot record in packet format.
■ You might not be able to use the “Exact Copy” function of RecordNow!
to back up a DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW disc that was
made with other software on a different DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/
+R DL/+RW recorder.
■ If you add data to a DVD-R/-R DL and DVD+R/+R DL disc that you
have already recorded to, you might not be able to read the added data
under some circumstances. It cannot be read in 16-bit operating
systems, such as Windows 98SE and Windows Me. In Windows NT4,
you will need Service Pack 6 or later to read added data. In Windows
2000, you will need Service Pack 2 or later to read it. Some DVD-ROM
and DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drives cannot read added data regardless of
the operating system.
■ RecordNow! does not support recording to DVD-RAM discs. To record
to a DVD-RAM, use Explorer or another utility.
■ When you back up a DVD disc, be sure the source drive supports
recording to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs. If the
source drive does not support recording to DVD-R/-R DL/-RW or
DVD+R/+R DL/+RW discs, it might not be backed up correctly.
■ When you back up a DVD-R/-R DL, DVD-RW, DVD+R/+R DL or
DVD+RW, be sure to use the same type of disc.
■ You cannot partially delete any data written to a CD-RW, DVD-RW or
DVD+RW disc.
Data Verification
To verify that data is written or rewritten correctly, follow the steps below
before you write or rewrite a Data CD/DVD.
1. Click the Options button (
) on the RecordNow! Console to open
the Options panels.
2. Select the Data in the left-side menu.
3. Mark the Verify data written to the disc after burning check box in the
Data Options.
4. Click the OK button.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-21
Operating Basics
DLA for TOSHIBA
Note the following limitations when you use DLA:
■ This software supports only rewritable discs (DVD+RW, DVD-RW, and
CD-RW). It does not support DVD+R/+R DL, DVD-R/-R DL, and CD-R
discs that are not rewritable.
■ DLA does not support formatting and writing to a DVD-RAM disc - these
functions are performed by DVD-RAM Driver Software. Even if the DLA
Format menu appears when inserting a DVD-RAM disc and rightclicking the drive icon in Windows Explorer, you should use the
'DVDForm' command to format this disc. You can run 'DVDForm' by
clicking the Start button on the taskbar to display the Start menu and
then selecting 'All Programs', 'DVD-RAM', 'DVD-RAM Driver' and
'DVDForm' sequentially.
■ Do not use any discs that have been formatted with packet writing
software other than DLA. Similarly, do not use any discs that have been
formatted with DLA with any packet writing software other than DLA.
When using a disc you are not familiar with, format it by selecting “Full
Format” before using it.
■ Do not use the cut-and-paste function for files and folders. A file or
folder that has been cut may be lost if writing fails due to an error on the
disc.
■ When writing any setup files for an application to a disc formatted by
DLA, and attempting to start Setup from this disc, an error may occur. In
this case, please copy the files to your hard disk and then run Setup
from there.
When using WinDVD Creator Platinum
You can record video back to your digital camcorder via i.LINK (IEEE1394)
using WinDVD Creator Platinum. However, there is a case where its
playback sound appears choppy - in this instance please follow the
instructions below:
1. Click start and select the Control Panel.
2. Click the Performance and Maintenance icon in the Control Panel.
3. Click the System icon in the Performance and Maintenance window.
4. Click the Advanced tab in the System Properties window.
5. Click the Settings icon in the “Performance” section.
6. Click the Advanced tab in the Performance Options window.
7. Click the Change icon in the “virtual memory” section.
8. Select the Custom size button in the Virtual Memory window.
9. Specify much higher values for “Initial size” and “Maximum size.”
10. Click the Set button in the Virtual Memory window.
11. Click the OK button in the Virtual Memory window.
Downloaded
4-22
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
How to make a DVD-Video
Simplified steps for making a DVD-Video from video data captured from a
DV-Camcorder:
1. Click Start -> All Programs -> InterVideo WinDVD Creator2 ->
InterVideo WinDVD Creator to launch WinDVD Creator.
2. Click Capture button then capture the video data from the DVCamcorder via IEEE1394.
3. Click Edit button then drag the video clips from Video Library tab to
the edit track.
4. Click Make Movie button in the top bar.
5. Double Click the Right arrow button icon in the center of right side.
6. Put a blank DVD-R/+R disc or an erased DVD-RW/+RW disc in the
drive.
7. Click Start to record to the disc.
8. When recording is finished, the tray opens.
How to learn more about InterVideo WinDVD Creator
Please refer to the on-line Help for additional InterVideo WinDVD Creator
information.
Important information for use
Note the following limitations when you write to a video DVD:
1. Editing digital video
■ Log in with Administrator rights to use WinDVD Creator.
■ Make sure that your computer is running on AC power when using
WinDVD Creator.
■ Operate the computer at Full Power. Do not use power-saving
features.
■ While you are editing a DVD-Video, you can display previews.
However, if another application is running, the preview might not
display properly.
■ WinDVD Creator cannot show video on the external monitor when in
simultaneous mode.
■ WinDVD Creator cannot edit or play copy protected content.
■ Do not change display settings while using WinDVD Creator.
■ Do not enter standby/Hibernation Mode while using WinDVD
Creator.
■ Do not operate WinDVD Creator immediately after turning on the
computer. Please wait until all disk/disc drive activity has stopped.
■ When recording to a DV-Camcorder, to ensure you capture all of
your data, let the camcorder record for a few seconds before you
begin recording your actual data.
■ CD recorder, JPEG functions, DVD-Audio, mini DVD and Video CD
functions are not supported in this version.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-23
Operating Basics
■ While recording video to DVD or tape, please close all other
programs.
■ Do not run software like a screen saver because it can put a heavy
load on the CPU.
■ Do not run communication applications like a modem or a LAN.
2. Before recording the video to DVD
■ When you record to DVD discs, please use only media
recommended by TOSHIBA.
■ Do not set the working drive to a slow device like a USB 1.1 hard
disk drive or it will fail to write the DVD.
■ Do not perform any of the following actions:
• Operate the computer for any other function, including using a
mouse or Touch Pad or closing/opening the LCD panel.
• Bump or cause vibration to the computer.
• Use the Mode control button and Audio/Video control button to
reproduce music or voice.
• Open the optical disk drive.
• Install, remove or connect external devices, including the
following:
PC card, SD card, USB devices, external monitor, i.LINK devices,
optical digital devices.
■ Please verify your disc after recording important data.
■ DVD-R/+R/-RW discs cannot be written in VR format.
■ WinDVD Creator cannot export to DVD-Audio, VideoCD or miniDVD
format.
■ WinDVD Creator can write DVD-RAM/+RW in VR format, but the
disc may only play on your computer.
■ When writing to a DVD disc, WinDVD Creator requires 2GB or more
of disk space for every one hour of video.
■ When you make a fully recorded DVD, the chapter sequence may
not play correctly.
3. About Disc Manager
■ WinDVD Creator can edit one play list on a disc.
■ WinDVD Creator might show a different thumbnail than you
previously set in CE (Consumer Electronics) DVD-RAM recorder.
■ Using the Disc Manager, you can edit DVD-VR format on DVDRAM, DVD+VR format on DVD+RW, and DVD-Video format on
DVD-RW.
4. About recorded DVDs
■ Some DVD-ROM drives for personal computers or other DVD
players may not be able to read DVD-R/+R/-R DL/+R DL/-RW/+RW/
-RAM discs.
■ When playing your recorded disc on your computer, please use the
WinDVD software application.
Downloaded
4-24
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
■ If you use an over-used rewritable disc, the full formatting might be
locked. Please use a brand new disc.
Media care
This section provides tips on protecting data stored on your CD/DVDs and
floppy disks.
Handle your media with care. The following simple precautions will
increase the lifetime of your media and protect the data stored on them:
CD/DVDs
1. Store your CD/DVDs in the container they came in to protect them and
keep them clean.
2. Do not bend the CD/DVD.
3. Do not write on, apply a sticker to, or otherwise mar the surface of the
CD/DVD that contains data.
4. Hold the CD/DVD by its outside edge or the edge on the center hole.
Fingerprints on the surface can prevent the drive from properly reading
data.
5. Do not expose to direct sunlight, extreme heat or cold. Do not place
heavy objects on your CD/DVDs.
6. If your CD/DVDs become dusty or dirty, wipe them with a clean dry
cloth. Wipe from the center out, do not wipe in a circular direction
around the CD/DVD. If necessary, use a cloth dampened in water or a
neutral cleaner. Do not use benzine, thinner or similar cleaner.
Floppy disks
1. Store your floppy disks in the container they came in to protect them
and keep them clean. If a floppy disk is dirty, do not use cleaning fluid.
Clean it with a soft damp cloth.
2. Never open the shutter or touch the magnetic surface of your floppy
disk. You could permanently damage it and lose data.
3. Always handle floppy disks with care, to prevent the loss of stored data.
Always apply the floppy disk label in the correct location. Never apply a
new label on top of an existing one. The label could come loose and
damage the floppy drive.
4. Never use a pencil for writing on a floppy disk label. Pencil lead dust
could cause a system malfunction. Always use a felt-tipped pen. When
writing a title on a label, first write on the label, then apply the label to
the floppy disk.
5. Never put a floppy disk in a location where water or other liquid may
contact it or where it is excessively damp. It could cause data loss.
Never use a wet or damp floppy disk. It could damage the floppy disk
drive or other devices.
6. Data may be lost if the floppy disk is twisted; bent; or exposed to direct
sunlight, extreme heat or cold.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-25
Operating Basics
7. Do not place heavy objects on your floppy disks.
8. Do not eat, smoke, or use erasers near your floppy disks. Foreign
particles inside the floppy disk’s jacket can damage the magnetic
surface.
9. Magnetic energy can destroy the data on your floppy disks. Keep your
floppy disks away from speakers, radios, television sets and other
sources of magnetic fields.
Sound system
This section describes audio controls including sound levels.
Volume Control
The Volume Control utility lets you control the audio volume in Windows for
both playback and recording.
■ To launch Volume Control for playback, click start, point to All
Programs, point to Accessories, point to Entertainment and click
Volume Control.
■ To launch Recording Control, click Options, point to Properties, select
Realtek HD Audio input and click OK.
■ To view details of the Volume Control, click Help on the Volume
Control.
Microphone level
The change the microphone gain, follow the steps below.
1. Click start, point to All Programs, point to Accessories, point to
Entertainment and click Volume Control.
2. Click Options and point to Properties.
3. Select Mic Volume and click OK.
4. Click Options and select Advanced Controls.
5. Click Advanced.
6. Check the Microphone Boost checkbox.
Downloaded
4-26
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
Modem
This section describes how to connect and disconnect the internal modem
to and from a telephone jack.
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line
could cause a PC system failure.
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for
residences or offices.
■ Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see
lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the PC. An electric surge
caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or
hardware damage.
Region selection
Telecommunication regulations vary from one region to another, so you will
need to make sure the internal modem’s settings are correct for the region
in which it will be used.
The built-in modem can be used only in specified countries and regions.
Using the modem in an area not specified for use may cause a system
failure. Check the specified areas carefully before using it.
To select a region, follow the steps below.
1. Click start, point to All Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to
Networking and click Modem Region Select.
Do not use the Country/Region Select function in the Modem setup utility
in the Control Panel if the function is available. If you change the Country/
Region in the Control Panel, the change may not take effect.
2. The Region Selection icon will appear in the Windows Task Bar.
3. Click the icon with the primary mouse button to display a list of regions
that the modem supports. A sub menu for telephony location
information will also be displayed. A check will appear next to the
currently selected region and telephony location.
4. Select a region from the region menu or a telephony location from the
sub-menu.
■ When you click a region it becomes the modem’s region selection,
and the New Location for telephony will be set automatically.
■ When you select a telephony location, the corresponding region is
automatically selected and it becomes the modem’s current region
setting.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-27
Operating Basics
Properties menu
Click the icon with the secondary mouse button to display properties menu
on the screen.
Setting
You can enable or disable the following settings:
AutoRun Mode
The Region Select utility starts automatically when you start up the
operating system.
Open the Dialing Properties dialog box after selecting region.
The dialing properties dialog box will be displayed automatically after you
select the region.
Location list for region selection.
A submenu appears displaying location information for telephony.
Open dialog box, if the modem and Telephony Current Location region
code do not match.
A warning dialog box is displayed if current settings for region code and
telephony location are incorrect.
Modem Selection
If the computer cannot recognize the internal modem, a dialog box is
displayed. Select the COM port for your modem to use.
Dialing Properties
Select this item to display the dialing properties.
If you are using the computer in Japan, the Telecommunications Business
Law requires that you select Japan region mode. It is illegal to use the
modem in Japan with any other selection.
Connecting
To connect the modular cable, follow the steps below.
The modular cable that comes with the computer must be used to connect
the modem. Connect the end of the modular cable with the core to the
computer.
Downloaded
4-28
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
■ Connection to any communication line other than an analog phone line
could cause a PC system failure.
■ Connect the built-in modem only to ordinary analog phone lines.
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a digital line (ISDN).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to the digital connector on a
public telephone or to a digital private branch exchange (PBX).
■ Never connect the built-in modem to a key telephone system for
residences or offices.
■ Never operate your PC on AC power during a thunderstorm. If you see
lightning or hear thunder, immediately turn off the PC. An electric surge
caused by the storm, may result in a system failure, loss of data or
hardware damage.
1. Plug one end of the modular cable into the computer’s modem jack.
2. Plug the other end of the modular cable into a telephone jack.
Telephone jack
Modular cable
Modem jack
Figure 4-10 Connecting the internal modem
Do not pull on the cable or move the computer while the cable is
connected.
If you use a storage device such as an optical drive or hard disk drive
connected to a 16-bit PC card, you might experience the following modem
problems:
■ Modem speed is slow or communication is interrupted.
■ Skips may occur in sound.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-29
Operating Basics
Disconnecting
To disconnect the internal modular cable, follow the steps below.
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the telephone jack and pull out the
connector.
2. Disconnect the cable from the computer’s modem jack in the same
manner.
Wireless communications
The computer’s wireless communication function supports both Wireless
LAN and Bluetooth devices.
All models are provided with Wireless Communication switch. Some
models are equipped with both Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions.
Wireless LAN
The Wireless LAN is compatible with other LAN systems based on Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum /Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
radio technology that complies with IEEE802.11 Wireless LAN standard
(Revision A, B or G).
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 54Mbps (IEEE802.11a, 802.11g)
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 11Mbps (IEEE802.11b)
■ Frequency Channel Selection (Revision A: 5 GHz, Revision B/G: 2.4
GHz)
■ Roaming over multiple channels
■ Card Power Management
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based on 128 bit
encryption algorithm. (Intel module type).
■ Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based on 152 bit
encryption algorithm. (Atheros module type).
■ Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA).
■ Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) data encryption.
■ Wake-up on Wireless LAN (Intel module type)
Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake-up on
Wireless LAN is enabled.
Downloaded
4-30
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function consumes power even when
the system is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this
feature.
■ The values shown above are the theoretical maximums for Wireless
LAN standards. The actual values may differ.
■ The transmission speed over the Wireless LAN, and the distance over
which the Wireless LAN can reach, may vary depending on
surrounding electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point
design and configuration, client design and software/hardware
configurations. The transmission rate described is the theoretical
maximum speed as specified under the appropriate standard - the
actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical maximum
speed.
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function is effective only when it is
connected with AP. This function becomes invalid when the connection
is cut.
■ The Wake-up on Wireless LAN function is not available in battery
mode.
Security
■ TOSHIBA strongly recommend that you enable WEP (encryption)
functionality, otherwise your computer will be open to illegal access by
an outsider using a wireless connection. If this occurs, the outsider may
illegally access your system, eavesdrop, or cause the loss or
destruction of stored data.
■ TOSHIBA is not liable for the loss of data due to eavesdropping or
illegal access through the Wireless LAN and the damage thereof.
Bluetooth wireless technology
Some models in this series are equipped with Bluetooth™ wireless
technology that eliminates the need for cables between electronic devices
such as desktop computers, printers and mobile phones.
You cannot use the built-in Bluetooth functions and an optional Bluetooth
SD card 3 simultaneously.
Bluetooth wireless technology has the following features:
Worldwide operation
The Bluetooth radio transmitter and receiver operate in the 2.4 GHz band,
which is license-free and compatible with radio systems in most countries
in the world.
Radio links
You can easily establish links between two or more devices. The link is
maintained even if the devices are not within line of sight.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-31
Operating Basics
Security
Two advanced security mechanisms ensure a high level of security:
■ Authentication prevents access to critical data and makes it impossible
to falsify the origin of a message.
■ Encryption prevents eavesdropping and maintains link privacy.
BluetoothTM Stack for Windows® by TOSHIBA
Please note that this software is specifically designed for the following
operating systems:
■ Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional
■ Microsoft® Windows® XP
Detailed information regarding the use with these operating systems is
listed below. Please refer also to the electronic information which is
included with each software.
This BluetoothTM Stack is based on BluetoothTM Version 1.1/1.2/2.0+EDR
specification. TOSHIBA cannot confirm compatibility between any PC
products and/or other electronic devices that use BluetoothTM other than
TOSHIBA mobile PCs.
Release Notes related to the BluetoothTM Stack for
Windows® by TOSHIBA
1. Install:
On Windows2000 or Windows XP, BluetoothTM Stack for Windows® by
TOSHIBA does not have a digital signature.
2. Fax application software:
Regarding FAX application software, there are some software that you
cannot use on this BluetoothTM Stack.
3. Multi User:
On Windows XP, the use of Bluetooth is not supported in a multi-user
environment. This means that, when you use Bluetooth, other users
logged onto the same computer will not be able to use its Bluetooth
functionality.
Product Support:
The latest information regarding Operating System support, Language
Support or available upgrades can be found on our web site http://
www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe or
www.pcsupport.toshiba.com in the United States.
Downloaded
4-32
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
Wireless communication switch
You can enable or disable Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functions, with the
on/off switch. No transmissions are sent or received when the switch is off.
Slide the switch to the right to turn it on and to the left to turn it off.
■ Do not use the Wireless LAN or Bluetooth functionalities near a
microwave oven or in areas subject to radio interference or magnetic
fields. Interference from a microwave oven or other source can disrupt
Wireless LAN or Bluetooth operation.
■ Turn Wireless LAN and Bluetooth functionalities off when near a
person who may have a cardiac pacemaker implant or other medical
electric device. Radio waves may affect pacemaker or medical device
operation, possibly resulting in serious injury. Follow the instruction of
your medical device when using any Wireless LAN or Bluetooth
functionality.
■ Always turn off Wireless LAN or Bluetooth functionality if the PC is near
automatic control equipment or appliances such as automatic doors or
fire detectors. Radio waves can cause malfunction of such equipment,
possibly resulting in serious injury.
Wireless communication Indicator
The wireless communication indicator indicates the status of the wireless
communication functions.
Indicator status
Indication
Indicator off
Wireless communication switch is set to off.
Automatic power down because of overheating.
Power malfunction.
Indicator glows
Wireless communication switch is on. Wireless
LAN or Bluetooth is turned on by an application.
If you used the Task Bar to disable the Wireless LAN, restart the computer
or perform the following procedure to re-enable it: start, Control Panel,
System, Hardware Device Manager, Network adapters, IntelR PRO/
Wireless 3945BG/3945ABG Network Connection or Atheros
AR5006EG/AR5006EX Wireless Network Adapter and enable.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-33
Operating Basics
LAN
The computer has built-in support for Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second,
100BASE-TX) and Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,
1000BASE-T (only for Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo Processor models)).
This section describes how to connect/disconnect to a LAN.
Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake-up on
LAN is enabled.
■ The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system
is off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.
■ The link speed (10/100/1000 megabits per second) switches
automatically according to your network environment (connected
devices, cables, noise etc.).
LAN cable types
The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause a
malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator
regarding set-up procedures.
If you are using Gigabit Ethernet LAN (1000 megabits per second,
1000BASE-T), be sure to connect with a CAT5E cable or higher. You
cannot use a CAT3 or CAT5 cable.
If you are using Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100BASETX), be sure to connect with a CAT5 cable or higher. You cannot use a
CAT3 cable.
If you are using Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per second, 10BASE-T), you
can connect with a CAT3 or higher.
Connecting LAN cable
To connect the LAN cable, follow the steps below.
■ Connect the AC adaptor before connecting the LAN cable. The AC
adaptor must remain connected during LAN use. If you disconnect the
AC Adaptor while the computer is accessing a LAN, the system may
hang up.
■ Do not connect any other cable to the LAN jack except the LAN cable.
Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may occur.
■ Do not connect any power supplying device to the LAN cable that is
connected to the LAN jack. Otherwise, malfunctions or damage may
occur.
1. Turn off the power to the computer and to all external devices
connected to the computer.
Downloaded
4-34
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
2. Plug one end of the cable into the LAN jack. Press gently until you hear
the latch click into place.
LAN connector
LAN jack
Figure 4-11 Connecting the LAN cable
3. Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN hub connector. Check with
your LAN administrator before connecting to a hub.
When the computer is exchanging data with the LAN, the LAN Active
indicator glows orange. When the computer is connected to a LAN hub but
is not exchanging data, the Link indicator glows green.
Disconnecting LAN cable
To disconnect the LAN cable, follow the steps below.
Make sure the LAN Active indicator (orange LED) is out before you
disconnect the computer from the LAN.
1. Pinch the lever on the connector in the computer’s LAN jack and pull
out the connector.
2. Disconnect the cable from the LAN hub in the same manner. Check
with your LAN administrator before disconnecting from the hub.
Cleaning the computer
To help ensure long, trouble-free operation, keep the computer free of dust
and use care with liquids around the computer.
■ Be careful not to spill liquids into the computer. If the computer does get
wet, turn the power off immediately and let the computer dry completely
before you turn it on again.
■ Clean the computer using a slightly damp (with water) cloth. You can
use glass cleaner on the LCD display screen. Spray a small amount of
cleaner on a soft, clean cloth and wipe the screen gently with the cloth.
Never spray cleaner directly onto the computer or let liquid run into any
part of it. Never use harsh or caustic chemical products to clean the
computer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-35
Operating Basics
Moving the computer
The computer is designed for rugged durability. However, a few simple
precautions taken when moving the computer will help ensure trouble-free
operation.
■ Before moving the computer, it recommends changing the function of
HDD Protection. Refer to the section, Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
Protection, in this chapter.
■ Make sure all disk activity has ended before moving the computer.
Check the HDD indicator on the computer.
■ If a CD/DVD is in the drives, remove it. Also make sure the disc tray is
securely closed.
■ Turn off the power to the computer.
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripherals before moving the
computer.
■ Close the LCD display panel. Do not pick up the computer by its display
panel.
■ Before carrying your computer, shut down the computer, disconnect the
power cable and wait until the PC cools down. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in minor injury.
■ Always turn off the power when you move the computer. If the power
button has a lock, set it to the lock position. Also be careful not to
subject the computer to impact. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in damage to computer, computer failure or loss of data.
■ Never transport your computer with PC cards installed. This could
cause damage to your computer and/or PC card, resulting in product
failure.
■ Use the carrying case when transporting the computer.
■ When carrying your computer, be sure to hold it securely so that it does
not fall or hit anything.
■ Do not carry your computer by holding protruded portions.
Using the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Protection
This computer has a function for reducing the risk of damage on hard disk
drive.
Using the acceleration sensor built in the computer, HDD Protection
detects vibration, shocks, and those signs in the computer, and
automatically moves the HDD (Hard Disk Drive) head to the safe position to
reduce the risk of damage that could be caused to the disk by head-to-disk
contact.
■ This function does not guarantee that the hard disk drive will not be
damaged.
■ A secondary hard disk drive fitted to the computer is not supported by
the HDD protection function.
Downloaded
4-36
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
When vibration is detected, the following message is displayed, and the
icon in the notification area of the taskbar is changed to the protection
state. This message is displayed until the OK button is pressed or 30
seconds pass. When vibration subsides, the icon returns to the normal
state.
Figure 4-12 HDD Protection Message
Taskbar Icon
State
Icon
Description
Normal
HDD Protection is enabled.
Protection
HDD Protection is active. The hard disk drive
head is in a safe position.
OFF
HDD Protection is disabled.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-37
Operating Basics
TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties
You can make the HDD Protection settings by using the TOSHIBA HDD
Protection Properties window. To open the window, click start, point to All
Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click HDD Protection
setting. The window can also be started from the icon on the Taskbar, or
from the Control Panel.
Figure 4-13 TOSHIBA HDD Protection Properties
HDD Protection
You can choose whether to enable or disable HDD Protection.
Detection Level
This function can be set to four levels. The sensitivity levels in which
vibrations, impacts and their similar signs are detected can be set to OFF,
1, 2 and 3 in ascending order. Level 3 is recommended for better protection
of the computer. However, when the computer is used as handheld or in
other unstable conditions, setting the detection level to 3 could result in
frequent execution of HDD Protection, which will slow HDD reading and
writing. Set a lower detection level when the speed of HDD reading and
writing is a priority.
Different detection levels can be set depending on whether the computer is
used as handheld or mobile usages, or whether it is used in a stable
environment such as on a table in the workplace or at home. By setting
different detection levels for the computer depending on whether it runs
with the AC power (desktop) or with batteries (handheld or mobile usage),
the detection level automatically switches according to the power
connection mode.
Downloaded
4-38
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Operating Basics
Details
To open the Details window, click the Setup Detail button in the TOSHIBA
HDD Protection Properties window.
Figure 4-14 Details
Detection Level Amplification
When the AC adaptor is disconnected or the lid is closed, HDD Detection
assumes that the computer will be carried and sets the detection level to
the maximum for 10 seconds.
HDD Protection Message
Specify whether to display a message when HDD Protection is active.
■ This function does not work when the computer is starting, in standby,
in hibernation, in transition to hibernation, recovering from hibernation,
or powered off. Be sure to not subject the computer to vibration or
impact while the function is disabled.
■ This function supports only Windows® XP.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
4-39
Operating Basics
Heat dispersal
To protect from overheating, the CPU has an internal temperature sensor.
If the computer’s internal temperature rises to a certain level, the cooling
fan is turned on or the processing speed is lowered. You can select
whether to control the CPU temperature by turning on the fan first, then if
necessary, lowering the CPU speed. Or, by lowering the CPU speed first,
then if necessary, turning on the fan. Use the Cooling Method item of the
Basic Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
When the CPU temperature falls to a normal range, the fan is turned off
and the CPU operation returns to standard speed.
If the CPU temperature reaches an unacceptably high level with either
setting, the system automatically shuts down to prevent damage. Data in
memory will be lost.
Downloaded
4-40
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 5
The Keyboard
The computer’s keyboard layouts are compatible with a 101/102-key
enhanced keyboard. By pressing some keys in combination, all the 101/
102-key keyboard functions can be executed on the computer.
The number of keys on your keyboard depends on which country/region’s
keyboard layout your computer is configured with. Keyboards for numerous
languages are available.
There are six types of keys: typewriter keys, function keys, soft keys, Hot
keys, Windows special keys and keypad overlay.
Typewriter keys
The typewriter keys produce the upper- and lower-case letters, numbers,
punctuation marks, and special symbols that appear on the screen.
There are some differences, however, between using a typewriter and
using a computer keyboard:
■ Letters and numbers produced in computer text vary in width. Spaces,
which are created by a “space character,” may also vary depending on
line justification and other factors.
■ The lowercase l (el) and the number 1 (one) are not interchangeable on
computers as they are on a typewriter.
■ The uppercase O (oh) and the 0 (zero) are not interchangeable.
■ The Caps Lock function key locks only the alphabetic characters in
uppercase while the shift lock on a typewriter places all keys in the
shifted position.
■ The Shift keys, the Tab key, and the BkSp (backspace) key perform
the same function as their typewriter counterparts but also have special
computer functions.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
5-1
The Keyboard
Function keys: F1 … F12
The function keys (not to be confused with Fn) are the 12 keys at the top of
your keyboard. These keys function differently from other keys.
F1 through F12 are called function keys because they execute
programmed functions when pressed. Used in combination with the Fn
key, keys marked with icons execute specific functions on the computer.
Refer to the section, Soft keys: Fn key combinations, in this chapter. The
function executed by individual keys depends on the software you are
using.
Soft keys: Fn key combinations
The Fn (function) is unique to TOSHIBA computers and is used in
combination with other keys to form soft keys. Soft keys are key
combinations that enable, disable or configure specific features.
Some software may disable or interfere with soft-key operations. Soft-key
settings are not restored by the Standby feature.
Emulating keys on enhanced keyboard
Esc
F1
~
@
!
1
`
CapsLock
Shift
#
3
2
Q
Tab
F3
F2
W
A
F4
$
4
E
S
Z
%
5
R
D
X
F5
F
C
Y
G
V
I
J
N
F8
(
9
8
U
H
B
F7
*
&
7
^6
T
F6
F9
K
M
_
-
)
0
O
>
.
?
/
Scroll
lock
Bk Sp
Ins
Home
PgUp
\
Del
End
PgDn
F12
}
]
,,
,
:
;
Pause
Break
PrtSc
SysReq
F11
+
=
{
[
P
L
<
,
F10
Num
Lock
/
*.
7
8
9
Home
PgUp
+
Enter
Shift
4
5
1
End
2
6
3
PgDn
Enter
Ctrl
Alt
Alt
Ctrl
0
Ins
.
Del
Figure 5-1 A 101-key enhanced keyboard layout
The keyboard is designed to provide all the features of the 101-key
enhanced keyboard, shown in figure 5-1. The 101/102-key enhanced
keyboard has a numeric keypad and scroll lock key. It also has additional
Enter and Ctrl keys to the right of the main keyboard. Since the keyboard
is smaller and has fewer keys, some of the enhanced keyboard functions
must be simulated using two keys instead of one on the larger keyboard.
Your software may require you to use keys that the keyboard does not
have. Pressing the Fn key and one of the following keys simulates the
enhanced keyboard’s functions.
Downloaded
5-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Keyboard
Press Fn + F10 or Fn + F11 to access the integrated keypad. When
activated, the keys with gray markings on the bottom edge become
numeric keypad keys (Fn + F11) or cursor control keys (Fn + F10). Refer to
the Keypad overlay section in this chapter for more information on how to
operate these keys. The power on default for both settings is off.
Press Fn + F12 (ScrLock) to lock the cursor on a specific line. The power
on default is off.
Press Fn + Enter to simulate Enter on the enhanced keyboard’s numeric
keypad.
Press Fn + Ctrl to simulate the enhanced keyboard’s right Ctrl key.
Hot keys
Hot keys (Fn + a function or Esc key) let you enable or disable certain
features of the computer.
Sound mute: Pressing Fn + Esc in a Windows environment turns sound
on or off. When you press these hot keys, the current setting will change
and be displayed as an icon.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
5-3
The Keyboard
Instant security: Press Fn + F1 to blank the screen to prevent others from
accessing your data. To restore the screen and original settings, press any
key or press the Dual Pointing Device. If a screensaver password is
registered, a dialog box will appear. Enter the screensaver password and
click OK. If no password is set, the screen will be restored when you press
any key or press the Dual Pointing Device.
Power save mode: Pressing Fn + F2 changes the power save mode.
If you press Fn + F2 in a Windows environment, the settings dialog box for
the Power Save Mode will be displayed. Continue holding down Fn, and
release and press F2 again to toggle between the settings. Release both
Fn and F2 to put the new setting into effect. You can also change this
setting through the Profile options in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
Standby: When you press Fn + F3, the computer enters the Standby
Mode. Before entering Standby, a dialog box appears asking for your
confirmation. This dialog box will not be displayed in the future when you
click the check box.
Hibernation: When you press Fn + F4, the computer enters the
Hibernation Mode. Before entering Hibernation, a dialog box appears
asking for your confirmation. This dialog box will not be displayed in the
future when you click the check box.
Downloaded
5-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Keyboard
Display selection: Press Fn + F5 to change the active display device.
When you press these hot keys, a dialog box appears. Only selectable
devices will be displayed. Hold down Fn and press F5 again to change the
device. When you release Fn and F5, the selected device will change. If
you hold down these hot keys for five seconds the selection will return to
the internal LCD.
Internal LCD screen Brightness: Pressing Fn + F6 decreases the LCD
screen brightness in decrements. When you press these hot keys, the
current setting will be displayed for two seconds by an icon. You can also
change this setting through the Screen brightness item of the Basic Setup
tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
Internal LCD screen Brightness: Pressing Fn + F7 increases the LCD
screen brightness in increments. When you press these hot keys, the
current setting will be displayed for two seconds by a pop-up icon. You can
also change this setting through the Screen brightness item of the Basic
Setup tab in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
■ The brightness level is always set at the maximum value for about 18
seconds, when the internal LCD screen turns on.
■ LCD screen clarity increases with the brightness level.
Wireless setting: If your computer has both Bluetooth and Wireless LAN
functions, you can press Fn + F8 to select which type of wireless
communication you want to use. When you press these hot keys, a dialog
box will appear. Continue holding down Fn and press F8 to change the
setting. If wireless communication is turned off, Disabled Wireless
Communication Switch will be displayed.
If no wireless communication device is installed, no dialog box will appear.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
5-5
The Keyboard
Dual Pointing Device: Pressing Fn + F9 in a windows environment
enables or disables the Dual Pointing Device function. When you press
these hot keys, the current setting will change and be displayed as an icon.
LCD screen resolution selection: Press Fn + Space keys to change the
display resolution. Each time when you press these hot keys, the LCD
screen resolution changes as follows: The available resolution depends on
the model. With XGA, you can change the resolution between 800 × 600
and 1024 × 768 pixels. With SXGA, between 800 × 600 and 1400 × 1050
pixels.
Optical disk drive power icon: Press the Fn + Tab keys to turn the power
of the optical disk drive on or eject the disc tray. A dialog box is displayed
when this hotkey is pressed. To choose between the functions, press the
Tab key while holding down the Fn key. The chosen function is executed
when the Fn + Tab keys are released.
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (reduce): To reduce the icon size on the
desktop or the application window, press the 1 key while holding down the
Fn key.
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility (enlarge): To enlarge the icon size on the
desktop or the application window, press the 2 key while holding down the
Fn key.
Fn Sticky key
You can use the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility to make the Fn key sticky,
that is, you can press it once, release it, and then press an “F number” key.
To start the TOSHIBA Accessibility Utility, click start, point to All
Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click Accessibility.
Downloaded
5-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Keyboard
Windows special keys
The keyboard provides two keys that have special functions in Windows:
Windows logo key activates the start menu and the other, the application
key, has the same function as the secondary mouse button.
This key activates the Windows start menu.
This key has the same function as the secondary mouse button.
Keypad overlay
Your computer’s keyboard does not have an independent numeric keypad,
but its numeric keypad overlay functions like one.
The keys in the center of the keyboard with gray letters make up the
numeric keypad overlay. The overlay provides the same functions as the
numeric keypad on the 101/102-key enhanced keyboard in figure 5-2.
Turning on the overlays
The numeric keypad overlay can be used for numeric data input or cursor
and page control.
Arrow mode
To turn on the Arrow mode, press Fn + F10. The Arrow mode indicator
lights. Now try cursor and page control using the keys shown in figure 5-2.
Press Fn + F10 again to turn off the overlay.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
5-7
The Keyboard
Numeric mode
To turn on the Numeric mode, press Fn + F11. The Numeric mode
indicator lights. Now try numeric data entry using the keys in figure 5-2.
Press Fn + F11 again to turn off the overlay.
Figure 5-2 The numeric keypad overlay
Temporarily using normal keyboard (overlay on)
While using the overlay, you can temporarily access the normal keyboard
without turning off the overlay:
1. Hold Fn and press any other key. All keys will operate as if the overlay
were off.
2. Type upper-case characters by holding Fn + Shift and pressing a
character key.
3. Release Fn to continue using the overlay.
Temporarily using overlay (overlay off)
While using the normal keyboard, you can temporarily use the keypad
overlay without turning it on:
1. Press and hold down Fn.
2. Check the keyboard indicators. Pressing Fn turns on the most recently
used overlay. If the Numeric mode indicator lights, you can use the
overlay for numeric entry. If the Arrow mode indicator lights, you can
use the overlay for cursor and page control.
3. Release Fn to return to normal keyboard operation.
Downloaded
5-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
The Keyboard
Temporarily changing modes
If the computer is in Numeric mode, you can switch temporarily to Arrow
mode by pressing a shift key.
If the computer is in Arrow mode, you can switch temporarily to Numeric
mode by pressing a shift key.
Generating ASCII characters
Not all ASCII characters can be generated using normal keyboard
operation. But, you can generate these characters using their ASCII codes.
With the overlay on:
1. Hold down Alt.
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code.
3. Release Alt, and the ASCII character appears on the display screen.
With the overlay off:
1. Hold down Alt + Fn.
2. Using the overlay keys, type the ASCII code.
3. Release Alt + Fn, and the ASCII character appears on the display
screen.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
5-9
The Keyboard
Downloaded
5-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 6
Power and Power-Up Modes
The computer’s power resources include the AC adaptor, battery pack and
internal batteries. This chapter gives details on making the most effective
use of these resources including charging and changing batteries, tips for
saving battery power, and power up modes.
Power conditions
The computer’s operating capability and battery charge status are affected
by the power conditions: whether an AC adaptor is connected, whether a
battery pack is installed and what the charge level is for the battery.
Table 6-1 Power conditions
AC
adaptor
connected
Power on
Power off
(no operation)
Battery fully
charged
• Operates
• No charge
• LED: Battery green
DC IN green
• No charge
• LED: Battery green
DC IN green
Main Battery
partially
charged or no
charge
• Operates
• Charge
• LED: Battery orange
DC IN green
• Quick charge
• LED: Battery orange
DC IN green
No battery
installed
• Operates
• No charge
• LED: Battery off
DC IN green
• No charge
• LED: Battery off
DC IN green
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
6-1
Power and Power-Up Modes
Table 6-1 Power conditions continued
Power on
AC
adaptor
not
connected
Battery charge
is above low
battery trigger
point
• Operates
• LED: Battery off
DC IN off
Battery charge
is below low
battery trigger
point
• Operates
• LED: Battery
flashes orange
DC IN off
Battery charge
is exhausted
Computer shuts down*1
No battery
installed
• No operation
• LED: Battery off
DC IN off
*1
Power off
(no operation)
For the computer to shut down in hibernation mode, the hibernation
feature must be enabled in two places in TOSHIBA Power Saver: the
Hibernate window and the Battery Alarm item of the Alarm window. If a
main battery and a 2nd battery are installed, the computer does not shut
down until the charge in both batteries is exhausted.
When batteries are charged, the main battery is charged first. When it is
fully charged, the 2nd battery is charged.
Power indicators
As shown in the above table, the Battery, DC IN and Power indicators on
the system indicator alert you to the computer’s operating capability and
battery charge status.
Battery indicator
Check the Battery indicator to determine the status of the battery pack.
The following indicator lights indicate the battery status:
Downloaded
6-2
Flashing orange
The battery charge is low. The AC adaptor must
be connected to recharge the battery.
Orange
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and
charging the battery.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Power and Power-Up Modes
Green
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and the
battery is fully charged.
No light
Under any other conditions, the indicator does
not light.
If the battery pack becomes too hot while it is being charged, the charge
will stop and the Battery indicator will go out. When the battery pack’s
temperature falls to a normal range, charge will resume. This occurs
whether the computer’s power is on or off.
DC IN indicator
Check the DC IN indicator to determine the power status with the AC
adaptor connected:
Green
Indicates the AC adaptor is connected and
supplying proper power to the computer.
Flashing orange
Indicates a problem with the power supply. Plug
the AC adaptor into another power outlet. If it still
does not operate properly, contact your dealer.
No light
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not
light.
Power indicator
Check the Power indicator to determine the power status:
Green
Indicates power is being supplied to the computer
and the computer is turned on.
Blinking orange
Indicates power is being supplied to the computer
while the computer is in Standby Mode. The
indicator turns on for one second and off for two
seconds.
No light
Under any other conditions, the indicator does not
light.
Battery types
The computer has two types of batteries:
■ Battery pack (3600 mAh and 4400 mAh)
■ Real Time Clock (RTC) battery
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
6-3
Power and Power-Up Modes
Battery pack
When the AC adaptor is not connected, the computer’s main power source
is a removable lithium ion battery pack, also referred to in this manual as
the main battery. You can purchase additional battery packs for extended
use of the computer away from an AC power source.
Do not change the battery pack while the AC adaptor is connected.
Before you remove the battery pack, save your data and shut down the
computer, or set the computer to Hibernation Mode. While entering
Hibernation Mode, the computer saves the contents of memory to the hard
disk drive. However, for safety sake, it is best to save your data manually.
■ The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not
properly replaced, used, handled or disposed of. Dispose of the battery
as required by local ordinances or regulations. Use only batteries
recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.
■ Always use the battery pack supplied as an accessory or an equivalent
battery pack specified in the User's Manual. Other battery packs have
different voltage and terminal polarities. Use of non-conforming battery
packs could generate smoke or cause fire or rupture, possibly resulting
in serious injury.
■ Always dispose of used battery packs in compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations. Put insulating tape, such as cellophane tape, on
the electrode during transportation to avoid a possible short circuit, fire
or electric shock. Failure to do so could possibly result in serious injury.
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby
Mode. Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it will be
lost. When the computer is powered off in Standby Mode, and the AC
adaptor is not connected, the battery pack supplies power to maintain
data and programs in memory. If the battery pack is completely
discharged, Standby Mode will not function and the computer loses all
data in memory.
To ensure that the battery pack maintains its maximum capacity, operate
the computer on battery power at least once a month until the battery pack
is fully discharged. Refer to Extending battery life in this chapter for
procedures. If the computer is continuously operated on AC power through
an AC adaptor for an extended period, more than a month, the battery may
fail to retain a charge. It may not function efficiently over the expected life of
the battery and the Battery indicator may not indicate a low-battery
condition.
Downloaded
6-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Power and Power-Up Modes
Real Time Clock (RTC) battery
The Real Time Clock (RTC) battery provides power for the internal real
time clock and calendar. It also maintains the system configuration.
If the RTC battery becomes completely discharged, the system loses this
data and the real time clock and calendar stop working. The following
message appears when you turn on the power:
S
**** RTC battery is low or CMOS checksum is
inconsistent ****
Press [F1] key to set Date/Time.
You can change the Real Time Clock settings by pressing the F1 key.
Refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting for detail.
The computer’s RTC battery is a Ni-MH battery and should be replaced
only by your dealer or by a TOSHIBA service representative. The battery
can explode if not properly replaced, used, handled or disposed of.
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
The RTC battery does not charge while the computer is turned off even if
the AC adapter is attached.
Care and use of the battery pack
The battery pack is a vital component of portable computing. Taking proper
care of it will help ensure longer operating time on battery power as well as
a longer life for your battery pack. Follow the instructions in this section
carefully to ensure safe operation and maximum performance.
Refer to the enclosed Instruction Manual for Safety & Comfort for detailed
precautions and handling instructions.
■ Make sure the battery is securely installed in the computer before
attempting to charge the battery pack. Improper installation could
generate smoke or fire, or cause the battery pack to rupture.
■ Keep the battery pack out of reach of infants and children. It can cause
injury.
■ Use only battery packs recommended by TOSHIBA as replacements.
■ Charge the battery pack only in an ambient temperature between 5 and
35 degrees Celsius. Otherwise, the electrolyte solution might leak,
battery pack performance might deteriorate and the battery life might
be shortened.
■ Never install or remove the battery pack without first turning off the
power and disconnecting the AC adaptor. Never remove the battery
pack while the computer is in Standby Mode. Data will be lost.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
6-5
Power and Power-Up Modes
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on LAN function is
enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery pack, disable
the Wake-up on LAN function.
■ Never remove the battery pack while the Wake-up on Wireless LAN
function is enabled. Data will be lost. Before you remove a battery
pack, disable the Wake-up on Wireless LAN function.
■ To ensure the battery pack maintains maximum capacity, operate the
computer on battery power once a week until the battery pack is fully
discharged. Refer to the section Extending battery life in this chapter
for procedures. If the computer is continuously operated on AC power
for an extended period, more than a week, the battery might fail to
retain a charge. It might not function efficiently over the expected life of
the battery pack and the Battery indicator might not indicate a lowbattery condition.
■ After the battery pack is charged, avoid leaving the AC adaptor
connected and the computer turned off for more than a few hours at a
time. Continuing to charge a fully-charged battery pack can damage
the battery.
Charging the batteries
When the power in the battery pack becomes low, the Battery indicator
flashes orange indicating that only a few minutes of battery power remain. If
you continue to use the computer while the Battery indicator flashes, the
computer enables Hibernation Mode (so you don’t lose data) and
automatically turns off.
The computer enters Hibernate mode only if Hibernation is enabled in two
places: the Hibernate tab in Power Options and Setup Actions tab in
TOSHIBA Power Saver.
You must recharge a battery pack when it becomes discharged.
Procedures
To recharge a battery pack while it is installed in the computer, connect the
AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack and plug the other end into a working
outlet.
The Battery indicator glows orange when the battery is being charged.
Use only the computer connected to an AC power source or the optional
TOSHIBA Battery charger to charge the battery pack. Never attempt to
charge the battery pack with any other charger.
Downloaded
6-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Power and Power-Up Modes
Time
The following table shows the approximate time required to fully charge a
discharged battery.
Charging time (hours)
Battery type
Power on
Power off
Battery pack (3600 mAh)
about 4.5 to 10.0 or longer about 3.0
Battery pack (4400 mAh)
about 5.5 to 12.0 or longer about 3.0
RTC battery
8.0
Doesn't charge
The charging time when the computer is on is affected by ambient
temperature, the temperature of the computer and how you use the
computer. If you make heavy use of external devices, for example, the
battery might scarcely charge at all during operation. Refer also to the
section Maximizing battery operating time.
Battery charging notice
The battery may not charge right away under the following conditions:
■ The battery is extremely hot or cold. If the battery is extremely hot, it
might not charge at all. To ensure the battery charges to its full
capacity, charge the battery at room temperature of 10° to 30°C (50° to
88°F).
■ The battery is nearly completely discharged. Leave the AC adaptor
connected for a few minutes and the battery should begin charging.
The Battery indicator may show a rapid decrease in battery operating time
when you try to charge a battery under the following conditions:
■ The battery has not been used for a long time.
■ The battery has completely discharged and been left in the computer
for a long time.
■ A cool battery is installed in a warm computer.
In such case, follow the steps below.
1. Fully discharge the battery by leaving it in the computer with the power
on until the power automatically shuts off.
2. Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN 15V jack of the computer, and the
AC adaptor into power outlet.
3. Charge the battery until the Battery indicator glows green.
Repeat these steps two or three times until the battery recovers normal
capacity.
Leaving the AC adaptor connected will shorten battery life. At least once a
month, run the computer on battery power until the battery is fully
discharged, then recharge the battery.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
6-7
Power and Power-Up Modes
Monitoring battery capacity
Remaining battery power can be monitored in TOSHIBA Power Saver.
■ Wait at least 16 seconds after turning on the computer before trying to
monitor the remaining operating time. The computer needs this time to
check the battery’s remaining capacity and to calculate the remaining
operating time, based on the current power consumption rate and
remaining battery capacity. The actual remaining operating time may
differ slightly from the calculated time.
■ With repeated discharges and recharges, the battery’s capacity will
gradually decrease. Therefore, an often used, older battery will not
operate for as long as a new battery even when both are fully charged.
In this case, TOSHIBA Power Saver will indicate a 100% charge for
both the old and new battery, but the displayed estimated time
remaining will be shorter for the older battery.
Maximizing battery operating time
A battery’s usefulness depends on how long it can supply power on a
single charge.
How long the charge lasts in a battery depends on:
■ How you configure the computer (for example, whether you enable
battery-power saving options). The computer provides a battery save
mode, which can be set in TOSHIBA Power Saver, to conserve battery
power. This mode has the following options:
■ CPU Processing speed
■ Screen brightness
■ Cooling Method
■ System standby
■ System Hibernation
■ Monitor Power off
■ HDD Power off
■ How often and how long you use the hard disk, optical disc and the
floppy disk drive.
■ How much charge the battery contained to begin with.
■ How you use optional devices, such as a PC card, to which the battery
supplies power.
■ Enabling Standby Mode conserves battery power if you are frequently
turning the computer off and on.
■ Where you store your programs and data.
■ Closing the LCD display panel when you are not using the keyboard
saves power.
■ Operating time decreases at low temperatures.
Downloaded
6-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Power and Power-Up Modes
■ The condition of the battery terminals. Make sure the battery terminals
stay clean by wiping them with a clean dry cloth before installing the
battery pack.
Retaining data with power off
When you turn off your computer with fully charged batteries, the batteries
retain data for the following approximate time periods:
Retention time
Battery type
State and Retention Time
Battery pack (3600 mAh)
about 5 days (Standby Mode)
about 65 days (Boot mode)
Battery pack (4400 mAh)
about 6 days (Standby Mode)
about 80 days (Boot mode)
RTC battery
30 days
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
6-9
Power and Power-Up Modes
Extending battery life
To extend the life of your battery pack:
■ At least once a month, disconnect the computer from a power source
and operate it on battery power until the battery pack fully discharges.
Before doing so, follow the steps below.
1. Turn off the computer’s power.
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and turn on the computer’s power. If it
does not turn on go to step 4.
3. Operate the computer on battery power for five minutes. If the
battery pack has at least five minutes of operating time, continue
operating until the battery pack is fully discharged. If the Battery
indicator flashes or there is some other warning to indicate a low
battery, go to step 4.
4. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer and the power cord to a
power outlet. The DC IN indicator should glow green, and the
Battery indicator should glow orange to indicate that the battery
pack is being charged. If the DC IN indicator does not glow, power
is not being supplied. Check the connections for the AC adaptor
and power cord.
5. Charge the battery pack until the Battery indicator glows green.
■ If you have extra battery packs, rotate their use.
■ If you will not be using the system for an extended period, more than
one month, remove the battery pack.
■ Disconnect the AC adaptor when the battery is fully charged.
Overcharging makes the battery hot and shortens life.
■ If you are not going to use the computer for more than eight hours,
disconnect the AC adaptor.
■ Store spare battery packs in a cool dry place out of direct sunlight.
Replacing the battery pack
The battery pack is classified as a consumable item.
The operating life of the battery pack will gradually reduce through
repeated charging and discharging. It will need to be replaced when it
reaches the end of its operating life.
You might also replace a discharged battery pack with a charged spare
when you are operating your computer away from an AC power source.
This section explains how to remove and install the battery pack.
To remove a discharged battery pack, follow the steps below.
Downloaded
6-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Power and Power-Up Modes
■ Do not remove the battery pack while the computer is in Standby
Mode. Data is stored in RAM, so if the computer loses power it will be
lost.
■ In Hibernation Mode, data will be lost if you remove the battery pack or
disconnect the AC adaptor before the save is completed. Wait for the
HDD indicator to go out.
■ Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer or the
battery pack might fall out due to the unintentional release of the
battery release latch and cause injuries.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Save your work.
Turn the computer’s power off. Make sure the Power indicator is off.
Remove all cables connected to the computer.
Close the LCD display panel and turn the computer upside down.
5. Slide the battery lock to the unlock position ( ). (Slide it completely in
the direction of the arrow shown in the Figure 6-1).
6. Slide completely the battery release in the direction of the arrow shown
in the Figure 6-1 to release the battery pack.
Battery lock
Slit
Battery
release latch
Battery pack
Figure 6-1 Releasing the battery pack
7. Inset your fingernail into the slit and lift up the battery pack.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
6-11
Power and Power-Up Modes
8. Separate the battery pack and battery cover by releasing the latches.
Battery pack
Battery cover
Battery latches
Figure 6-2 Separating the battery pack and battery cover
To install a battery pack, follow the steps below.
Do not touch the battery release latch while holding the computer. Or you
may get injured by the dropped battery pack by unintentional release of the
battery release latch.
9. Attach the battery cover to the battery pack.
10. Insert the battery pack into the battery pack slot and lock it.
Battery pack
Battery lock
Figure 6-3 Securing the battery pack
11. Make sure that the battery pack is securely in place and the battery
lock is in the lock position ( ).
12. Turn your computer over.
TOSHIBA Password Utility
The TOSHIBA Password Utility provides two levels of password security:
User and Supervisor.
Passwords set in TOSHIBA Password Utility are different from the
Windows password.
Downloaded
6-12
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Power and Power-Up Modes
User Password
To start the utility, point to or click the following items:
start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities ->Password Utility
The User Password dialog box contains two main fields: User Password
and User Token.
User authentication may be required to validate user rights when using
"TOSHIBA Password Utility" to delete or change passwords, or create
tokens, etc.
User Password field
Set (button)
Click this button to register a password of up to 50 characters. After a
password is set, you will be prompted to enter it when you start the
computer.
Check "Set the same string simultaneously as HDD User Password"
when setting the HDD User Password.
■ Depending on models, the HDD (Hard Disk Drive) password is not
supported.
■ After you set the password, a dialog box will be displayed asking
whether you want to save it to a floppy disk or other media. If you forget
the password, you can open the password file on another computer. Be
sure to keep the media in a safe place.
■ When entering the character string to register the password, enter from
the keyboard character by character and do not enter as ASCII code or
copy-and-paste the character string. In addition, ensure that the
registered password is correct by outputting the character string to the
password file.
■ When entering a password, do not enter any characters (for example
“!” or “#”) produced by pressing the Shift or Alt keys and so on.
■ Delete (button)
Click this button to delete a registered password. Before you can delete
a password, you must first enter the current password correctly or insert
a proper token.
Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.
■ Change (button)
Click this button to change a registered password. Before you can
change a password, you must first enter the current password correctly
or insert a proper token.
Please use BIOS Setup to change or delete the HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
Passwords or to set the HDD Master Password.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
6-13
Power and Power-Up Modes
When entering a password, do not enter any characters (for example “!” or
“#”) produced by pressing the Shift or Alt keys and so on.
■ Owner String (text box)
You can use this box to associate text with the password. After you
enter text, click Apply or OK. When the computer is started, this text will
be displayed together with the prompt asking you to enter a password.
■ If you forget your HDD User Password, TOSHIBA will NOT be able to
assist you, and your HDD will be rendered COMPLETELY and
PERMANENTLY INOPERABLE. TOSHIBA will NOT be held
responsible for any loss of any data, any loss of use or access to your
HDD, or for any other losses to you or any other person or organization
that result from the loss of access to your HDD. If you cannot accept
this risk, don’t register the HDD User Password.
■ When setting the HDD Master Password, save the HDD User
Password settings in the BIOS SETUP Program.
■ When saving the HDD User Password shut down or restart the
computer. If the computer is not shut down or restarted, the saved data
may not be correctly reflected. For more information on shutting down
or restarting the computer, refer to Turning on the power in Chapter 3.
Refer to Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program section in Chapter 7
for more information.
User Token field
■ Create (button)
You can use an SD card token, instead of entering the password. After
you have registered a password, insert an SD card in SD card slot and
click Create. You can use an SD card of any capacity, but it must be
formatted correctly.
If an unformatted card or one with an incompatible format is inserted,
you will be prompted to format it with a tool named TOSHIBA SD
Memory Card Format. To start the format tool, point to or click the
following items:
start -> All Programs -> TOSHIBA -> Utilities -> SD Memory
Card Format
When you format an SD Memory card, all data will be deleted. Be sure to
save data on the card to other media before you format the card.
■ Disable (button)
Click this button to invalidate the token. You cannot re-validate old
tokens, but you can use the same SD cards to create new tokens.
Downloaded
6-14
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Power and Power-Up Modes
After using the token created for authentication, do not leave it inserted in
the SD card slot, ensure that the token is removed from the slot and stored
in a safe location. If the token is left in the slot, there is a danger of theft or
a third party using it for authentication and operating the user's computer
(resulting in extraction, modification or deletion of data) when the user is
not at their desk.
Supervisor Password
If you set a Supervisor Password, some functions might be restricted when
a user logs on with the User Password. To set a Supervisor Password,
execute the file TOSPU.EXE. The file is located at:
C:\Program Files\Toshiba\Windows Utilities\SVPWTool\TOSPU.EXE
This utility lets you do the following:
■ Register, delete or change the Supervisor Password.
■ Create or invalidate a Supervisor Password token.
This function in the TOSHIBA Password Utility lets you invalidate only
supervisor tokens or all tokens, including user and supervisor tokens.
■ Specify restrictions for general users.
Starting the computer by password
If you have already registered a password, there are three ways to start the
computer:
■ Insert an SD card token before you turn on the computer. The computer
will start normally, without displaying a password prompt.
■ Swipe your fingerprint on the sensor if you have already registered the
fingerprint with the Fingerprint utility and enabled Fingerprint Power-on
Security. If you would not like to swipe your finger or cannot
authenticate the fingerprint for some reasons, push the BkSp key to
skip the fingerprint authentication screen. You can try to swipe the
fingerprint up to five times. If you failed fingerprint authentication five
times, you must enter the password manually to start the computer.
■ Enter the password manually.
The password is necessary only if the computer was Shutdown and
Hibernation in boot mode.
It is not needed in Standby and Restart.
To enter a password manually, follow these steps:
1. Turn on the power as described in Chapter 3, Getting Started. The
following message will appear in the LCD:
S
Password=
2. Enter the Password.
3. Press Enter.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
6-15
Power and Power-Up Modes
If you enter the password incorrectly three times in a row, the computer
shuts off. In this case, you must turn the computer back on to retry
password entry.
Power-up modes
The computer has the following power-up modes:
■ Boot: Computer shuts down without saving data. Always save your
work before you turn the computer off in boot mode.
■ Hibernation: Data in memory is saved to the hard disk drive.
■ Standby: Data is maintained in the computer’s memory.
Refer also to the sections Turning on the power and Turning off the power
in Chapter 3, Getting Started.
Windows utilities
You can configure various settings associated with both Standby Mode and
Hibernation Mode within TOSHIBA Power Saver.
Hot keys
You can use hot keys Fn + F3 to enter Standby Mode and Fn + F4 to enter
Hibernation. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard for details.
Panel power on/off
You can set up your computer so that power turns off automatically when
you close the display panel. When you open the panel, power will be turned
on in Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode but not in boot mode.
If the panel power off function is enabled and you manually shut down
Windows, do not close the computer’s LCD display panel until the shut
down process has been completed.
System Auto Off
This feature turns the system off automatically if it is not used for a set
duration. The system shuts down in Standby Mode or Hibernation Mode in
Windows.
Downloaded
6-16
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 7
HW Setup
This chapter explains how to use TOSHIBA HW Setup program to
configure your computer, and provides information on setting up the
Execute-Disable Bit Capability and TPM.
Accessing HW Setup
To run HW Setup, click start, click Control Panel, click Printers and
Other Hardware and select TOSHIBA HWSetup.
HW Setup window
The HW Setup window contains the following tabs: General, Display, Boot
Priority, Keyboard, CPU, LAN, Device Config, Parallel/Printer and USB.
There are also three buttons: OK, Cancel and Apply.
OK
Accepts your changes and closes the HW Setup
window.
Cancel
Closes the window without accepting your
changes.
Apply
Accepts all your changes without closing the HW
Setup window.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
7-1
HW Setup
General
This window displays the BIOS version and contains two buttons: Default
and About.
Default
Return all HW Setup values to the factory
settings.
About
Display the HW Setup version.
Setup
This field displays BIOS Version and date.
Display
This tab lets you customize your computer’s display settings for either the
internal LCD screen or for an external monitor.
Power On Display
Lets you select the display to be used when the computer is booted. (This
setting is only available on Standard VGA mode and is not available on
Windows Desktop properties).
Auto-Selected
Selects an external monitor if one is connected.
Otherwise, it selects the internal LCD (Default).
LCD + Analog RGB
Selects both the internal LCD and external
monitor for simultaneous display.
If the connected external monitor does not support the computer's current
video mode, selecting the LCD + Analog RGB mode will not display any
image on the external monitor.
When Windows starts up, the screen will be displayed on the external
monitor if it was connected when the notebook was previously switched off
and is still connected when the computer is switched on. Otherwise, the
screen will be displayed on the internal LCD.
Downloaded
7-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
HW Setup
Boot Priority
Boot Priority Options
This option sets the priority for booting the computer. Select from the
following settings:
HDD −> FDD −> CDROM −> LAN
The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: HDD, floppy disk drive*1, CDROM*2 and LAN (Default).
FDD −> HDD −> CDROM −> LAN
The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: floppy disk drive*1, HDD, CDROM*2 and LAN.
HDD −> CD-ROM −>
LAN −> FDD
The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: HDD, CD-ROM*2, LAN and
floppy disk drive*1.
FDD −> CD-ROM −>
LAN −> HDD
The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: floppy disk drive*1, CD-ROM*2,
LAN and HDD.
CD-ROM −> LAN −>
HDD −> FDD
The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: CD-ROM*2, LAN, HDD, floppy
disk drive*1.
CD-ROM −> LAN −>
FDD −> HDD
The computer looks for bootable files in the
following order: CD-ROM*2, LAN, floppy disk
drive*1 and HDD.
You can override the settings and manually select a boot device by
pressing one of the following keys while the computer is booting:
U
Selects the USB floppy disk drive.
N
Selects the network.
1
Selects the primary HDD.
C
Selects the CD-ROM*2.
M
Selects the USB Memory.
*1 The floppy disk drive will be used to start the computer when there is a
bootable disk contained in the external drive. If SD memory is installed as
well, the external floppy disk drive will be checked first, followed by the SD
memory device itself.
*2 The optical disk drive will be used to start the computer when there is a
bootable disk contained in the drive.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
7-3
HW Setup
To change the boot drive, follow the steps below.
1. Hold down F12 and boot the computer.
2. The following menu will be displayed with the following icons: Built-in
HDD, CD-ROM, FDD (or SD memory card), Network (LAN), USB
Memory boot.
A bar will appear only under the selected device.
3. Use the left/right cursor keys to highlight the boot device you want and
press Enter.
■ If only a Supervisor Password has been set, the following should be
noted:
■ The boot device menu will appear when the 'Able to run HW Setup'
option has been configured.
■ The boot device menu will not appear when the 'Unable to run HW
Setup' option has been configured.
■ If both a Supervisor Password and a User Password are set, the
following should be noted:
■ The boot device menu will appear when you use either the
Supervisor Password or the User Password to start the computer,
and the 'Able to run HW Setup' option has been configured.
■ The boot device menu will not appear when you use the User
Password to start the computer and the 'Unable to run HW Setup'
option has been configured.
■ The boot device menu will appear when you use the Supervisor
Password to start the computer, even if the 'Unable to run HW
Setup' option has been configured.
The boot device selection methods described above will not change the
boot priority settings that have been configured in HW Setup. In addition, if
you press a key other than one of those listed, or if the selected device is
not installed, the system will continue to boot according to the current and
available settings in HW Setup.
Downloaded
7-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
HW Setup
HDD Priority Options
If more than one HDD is installed in the computer, this option lets you set
the priority for HDD detection. If the first detected HDD has a boot
command, the system will boot from the HDD.
Built-in HDD ->
USB (Default)
The priority is set as built-in HDD -> USB.
USB -> Built-in
HDD
The priority is set as USB -> built-in HDD.
■ If a boot command is not found on the first detected HDD, the system
will not boot from the other HDD. It will search the next device in the
boot priority for a boot command.
■ Some modules may not be displayed.
USB Memory BIOS Support Type
Set the type of the USB memory as a startup device.
HDD
Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent
to the HDD (Default).
* Based on the [HDD] order in the [Boot Priority
Options] item. The order with respect to the other
HDD can be set in the [HDD Priority Options]
item.
FDD
Set the type of the USB memory to be equivalent
to the FDD.
* Based on the [FDD] order in the [Boot Priority
Options] item.
Network Boot Protocol
This feature sets the protocol to remotely boot from the network.
Network Boot Protocol is not displayed for Gigabit Ethernet LAN.
[PXE] Sets PXE as the protocol (Default).
[RPL] Sets RPL as the protocol.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
7-5
HW Setup
Keyboard
External Keyboard Fn key
Use this option to set a key combination on an external keyboard to
emulate the Fn key on the computer’s internal keyboard. Setting an Fn key
equivalent will let you use Hot keys by pressing the set combination instead
of the Fn key (PS/2 keyboard only).
Disabled
No Fn key equivalent (Default).
Fn Equivalent
Left Ctrl
Right Ctrl
Left Alt
Right Alt
Left Alt
+
+
+
+
+
Left Alt
Right Alt
Left Shift
Right Shift
Caps Lock
If you select Left Ctrl + Left Alt or Right Ctrl + Right Alt for this option,
you cannot use the selected keys to reboot the computer in combination
with the Del key. For example, if you select Left Ctrl + Left Alt, you must
use Right Ctrl, Right Alt and Del to reboot the computer. Left Ctrl, Left
Alt and Del cannot be used.
Wake-up on Keyboard
When this feature is enabled and the computer is in Standby Mode, you
can turn on the computer by pressing any key. It is effective only for the
internal keyboard and only when the computer is in Standby Mode.
Downloaded
7-6
Enabled
Enables the Wake-up on Keyboard function.
Disabled
Disables the Wake-up on Keyboard function (Default).
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
HW Setup
CPU
This function lets you set the CPU operating mode.
This option is displayed only on models with an Intel® CoreTM Duo
processor and Intel® CoreTM Solo processor.
Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
This option lets you choose from the following settings:
Dynamically
Switchable
CPU power consumption and clock speed
automatic switching function is enabled. When
the computer is in use, CPU operation is
automatically switched when necessary
(Default).
Always High
CPU power consumption and clock speed
automatic switching function is disabled. The
CPU always runs at its fastest speed.
Always Low
CPU power consumption and clock speed
automatic switching function is disabled. The
CPU always runs at low power consumption and
low speed.
LAN
Wake-up on LAN
This feature lets the computer’s power be turned on when it receives a
wake-up signal from the LAN.
Enabled
Enables Wake-up on LAN.
Disabled
Disables Wake-up on LAN (Default).
Do not install or remove an optional memory module while Wake-up on
LAN is enabled.
The Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even when the system is
off. Leave the AC adaptor connected while using this feature.
Built-in LAN
This feature enables or disables the Built-in LAN.
Enabled
Enables Built-in LAN functions (Default).
Disabled
Disables Built-in LAN functions.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
7-7
HW Setup
Device Config
Device Configuration
This option lets you set the device configuration.
All Devices
BIOS sets all devices.
Setup by OS
Operating system sets devices that it can control
(Default).
Parallel/Printer
Some models are equipped with Parallel/Printer tab. This tab lets you set
the Parallel Port Mode. Use the Windows Device Manager to make settings
for the Parallel port.
Parallel Port Mode
The options in this tab are ECP and Standard Bi-directional.
ECP
Sets the port type to Extended Capabilities Port
(ECP). For most printers, the port should be set
to ECP (Default).
Standard
Bi-directional
This setting should be used with some other
parallel devices.
USB
USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
Use this option to enable or disable USB keyboard/mouse legacy
emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use
a USB mouse and keyboard by setting the USB KB/Mouse Legacy
Emulation item to Enabled.
Enabled
Enables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
function (Default).
Disabled
Disables the USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
function.
USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
Use this option to enable or disable USB floppy disk drive legacy
emulation. If your operating system does not support USB, you can still use
a USB floppy disk drive by setting the USB-FDD Legacy Emulation item
to Enabled.
Downloaded
7-8
Enabled
Enables the USB floppy disk drive legacy
emulation function (Default).
Disabled
Disables the USB floppy disk drive legacy
emulation function.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
HW Setup
Configuring the Execute-Disable Bit Capability and
TPM
The configurations for the Execute-Disable Bit Capability and TPM are
carried out in the BIOS setup program.
Notes before using the BIOS Setup
■ In most cases, changes to the system's configuration should be made
within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW Setup,
TOSHIBA Password Utility, TOSHIBA Power Saver, Windows
Device Manager and so forth. If you make changes to the
configuration through the BIOS setup program, please be aware that
the configuration set through the Windows applications will take
priority.
■ Changes to the settings within the BIOS setup program will not be
erased even if the power supply is switched off and the main battery
removed. However, if the built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) battery runs
out of power, most of the settings will revert back to their default
values. However, please note that the following items will not be
affected in this instance:
• Password
• Hard Disk Drive Password
• Security controller
Starting and Ending the BIOS Setup Program
Starting the BIOS Setup Program
1. Switch on your computer while pressing the Esc key.
If “Password =” is displayed, enter either the Supervisor Password, if
one is set, or the User Password and press the Enter key.
Please refer to Chapter 6, the TOSHIBA Password Utility, for details
about the User Password.
The “Check system. Then press [F1] key.” message is
displayed.
2. Press the F1 key.
The BIOS setup program will start up.
Select either the Execute-Disable Bit Capability or settings in the security
controller to make changes. Please refer to the operating instructions
displayed in the settings screen.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
7-9
HW Setup
Ending the BIOS Setup Program
Save the changes and end the program.
1. Press the End Key.
The “Are you sure? (Y/N) The changes you made will
cause the system to reboot.” message is displayed.
2. Press the Y key.
The configured settings are saved and the BIOS setup program ends.
The computer may reboot depending on the settings that were
modified.
Ending the BIOS Setup Program Halfway
The configuration settings can be terminated halfway without saving any of
the changes made.
1. Press the Esc key.
The “Exit without saving? (Y/N)” message is displayed.
2. Press the Y key.
The BIOS setup program will end.
Core Multi-Processing
The Core Multi-Processing sets the CPU operating mode.
This option is displayed only on models with an Intel® CoreTM Duo
processor.
Enabled is Dual Core mode.
Disabled is Single Core mode.
Enabled
Enables Core Multi - Processing functions
(Default).
Disabled
Disables Core Multi - Processing functions.
Virtualization Technology
Virtualization Technology sets enable or disable of the Intel Virtualization
Technology installed in the CPU.
Intel Virtualization Technology is the technique that allows one machine to
operate as multiple virtual machines.
The Virtualization Technology is supported with some models.
The Disabled command does not allow use of the Intel Virtualization
Technology.
The Enabled command allows use of the Intel Virtualization Technology.
Downloaded
7-10
Enabled
Enables Virtualization Technology.
Disabled
Disables Virtualization Technology (Default).
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
HW Setup
Enhanced C-States
This feature enables or disables the Enhanced C-States.
Enabled
This lowers the power consumption.
Disabled
This does not lower the power consumption.
Execute-Disable Bit Capability
This setting, which is displayed on the first page of the setup screen,
configures the Execute-Disable Bit function of the CPU. This function is
specific to Intel® processors and, when activated, helps to reduce security
threats to the computer by preventing certain classes of malicious 'buffer
overflow' attacks when combined with a supporting operating system such
as Windows XP.
Available
Makes the processor's Execute-Disable Bit
Capability available for use.
Not Available
Disables the processor's Execute-Disable Bit
Capability so that it is not available for use.
(Default).
System configuration changes, other than changes to this setting, should
be made within Windows by using applications such as TOSHIBA HW
Setup, TOSHIBA Password Utility, TOSHIBA Power Saver, Windows
Device Manager and so forth.
Security controller
The security controller settings are available in SYSTEM SETUP (2/2).
TPM
This setting enables or disables the security controller known as TPM
(Trusted Platform Module).
Enabled
Enables the TPM.
Disabled
Disables the TPM (Default).
Clear TPM Owner
This setting is used to erase the data in TPM when disposing of the
computer or when the owner of the computer changes, etc. Once this
operation is carried out, the TPM configuration settings are erased, such
that the encrypted data can no longer be decrypted and the files can no
longer be read. Please backup or delete the data as necessary before
carrying out this operation.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
7-11
HW Setup
The operating procedure is as follows:
1. Move the cursor to the Clear TPM Owner setting and press the Space
key or BkSp key.
2. A message is displayed. Press the Y, E, S, and Enter keys and the
TPM information is erased.
3. The TPM setting changes from being displayed as Enable to Disabled,
and the setting is no longer displayed.
■ System configuration changes other than changes to this setting
should be made in Windows using TOSHIBA HW Setup, TOSHIBA
Password Utility, TOSHIBA Power Saver, Device Manager, etc.
■ When using TPM, please install the Infineon TPM Installation Guide
from the TOSHIBA Application Installer.
Please ensure that the user reads the Infineon TPM Installation
Guide as it contains usage information and notes on using TPM.
Diagnostic Mode
Set whether the BIOS Setup Diagnostic test is enabled.
Disabled
(Default)
The Diagnostic test is disabled.
Enabled
The Diagnostic test is enabled.
Beep Volume
Set the volume to High, Medium, Low or Off.
Downloaded
7-12
High
Sets the beep volume to high.
Medium (Default)
Sets the beep volume to high.medium.
Low
Sets the beep volume to high.low.
Off
Mutes the beep volume.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 8
Optional Devices
Optional devices can expand the computer’s capabilities and its versatility.
This chapter describes connection or installation of the following devices,
which are available from your TOSHIBA dealer:
Cards/memory
■ PC card
■ SD card
■ Memory expansion
Power devices
■ Battery pack
■ AC adaptor
■ Battery charger
Peripheral devices
■
■
■
■
■
USB floppy disk drive
External monitor
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
Advanced Port Replicator lll Plus
Serial port
Other
■ Security lock
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-1
Optional Devices
PC card
The computer is equipped with a PC card slot that can accommodate a
Type II card. Any PC card that meets industry standards (manufactured by
TOSHIBA or other vendor) can be installed. The slot supports 16-bit PC
cards, including PC card 16’s multifunction card and CardBus PC cards.
CardBus supports the new standard of 32-bit PC cards. The bus provides
superior performance for the greater demands of multimedia data
transmission.
PC cards can sometimes become hot during PC operation. Before you
remove a PC card always wait for it to cool. You could get burned
removing a hot PC card.
Inserting a PC card
Windows hot-install feature lets you insert PC cards while the computer’s
power is on.
Do not insert a PC card while the computer is in standby or Hibernation
Mode. Some cards might not work properly.
To insert a PC card, follow the steps below:
1. Insert a PC card in the PC card slot.
2. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.
PC card slot
PC card
Figure 8-1 Inserting the PC card
3. After inserting the PC card, refer to the PC card’s documentation and
check the configuration in Windows to make sure it is appropriate for
your PC card.
Downloaded
8-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Optional Devices
Removing a PC card
To remove the PC card, follow the steps below.
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.
2. Point to PC card and click.
3. Press the PC card eject button to extend it.
If the PC card is not inserted all the way, the eject button may not cause it
to pop out sufficiently to allows it to be grasped. Be sure to push the PC
card firmly into the computer and slide the eject button again.
4. Press the extended eject button to pop the card out slightly.
5. Grasp the PC card and draw it out.
PC card
PC card
eject button
Figure 8-2 Removing the PC card
SD card
The computer is equipped with the Bridge media slot that can
accommodate Secure Digital flash memory cards with various memory
capacities. SD cards let you easily transfer data from devices, such as
digital cameras and Personal Digital Assistants, that use SD card
flashmemory. The cards have a high level of security and copy protection
features.
Keep foreign objects out of the Bridge media slot. Never allow metal
objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to enter the PC or
keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short circuit, which can
cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in serious injury.
SD memory cards comply with SDMI (Secure Digital Music Initiative),
which is a technology adopted to prevent unlawful copy or playback of
digital music. For this reason, you cannot copy or playback protected
material on another computer or other device. You may not use the
reproduction of any copyrighted material except for your personal
enjoyment.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-3
Optional Devices
Formatting an SD memory card
SD memory cards are sold already formatted in conformity to specific
standards. If you format the SD card again, be sure to format it with the
TOSHIBA SD memory card format utility, not with the format commands
provided within Windows.
In order to run TOSHIBA SD memory card format, click start, point to All
Programs, point to TOSHIBA, point to Utilities and click SD memory card
Format.
The TOSHIBA SD memory card format utility does not format the protected
area of the SD memory card. Should you need to format all areas of the
memory card, including the protected area, you will need to obtain an
appropriate application that applies the copy protection system.
Inserting an SD card
To insert an SD card, follow the steps below.
1. Insert an SD card in the Bridge media slot.
2. Press gently to ensure a firm connection.
SD card
SD card slot
Figure 8-3 Inserting an SD card
■ Make sure the SD card is oriented properly before you insert it.
■ Make sure that the SD card is facing the correct direction when
inserting it into the bridge media slot.
■ Do not turn the computer off or switch to Standby Mode or Hibernate
Mode while files are being copied - doing so may cause data to be lost.
Removing an SD card
To remove an SD card, follow the steps below.
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.
2. Point to SD card and click.
Downloaded
8-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Optional Devices
3. Push in the SD card and release it to pop the card out slightly.
4. Grasp the SD card and remove it.
SD card
Figure 8-4 Removing an SD card
■ Make sure the SD card indicator is out before you remove the SD card
or turn off the computer’s power. If you remove the SD card or turn off
the power while the computer is accessing the SD card you may lose
data or damage the card.
■ Do not remove an SD card while the computer is in Standby or
Hibernation Mode. The computer could become unstable or data in the
SD card could be lost.
SD card care
Set the write-protect switch to the lock position, if you do not want to record
data.
■ Do not write to an SD card if the battery power is low. Low power could
affect writing accuracy.
■ Do not remove an SD card while read/write is in progress.
■ The SD card is designed so that it can be inserted only one way. Do not
try to force the SD card into the Bridge media slot.
■ Do not leave an SD card partially inserted in the slot. Press the SD card
until you hear it click into place.
■ Do not twist or bend SD cards.
■ Do not expose SD cards to liquids or store in humid areas or lay media
close to containers of liquid.
■ After using an SD card, return it to its case.
■ Do not touch the metal part or expose it to liquids or let it get dirty.
Creation of a boot disk
Within the TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility, a bootable SD memory card
can be created if required. Refer to the Utilities of Chapter 1, Introduction
for details.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-5
Optional Devices
Memory expansion
You can install additional memory in the computer’s memory module slot to
increase the amount of RAM. This section describes how to install and
remove a memory module.
■ Place a mat beneath the computer to prevent scratching or damaging
the computer's lid when installing/replacing the memory module. Avoid
mats made of materials that generate static electricity.
■ When you install or remove a memory module, ensure that you do not
touch any other internal areas of the computer.
■ Use only memory modules approved by TOSHIBA.
■ Do not try to install or remove a memory module under the following
conditions as you can damage the computer and/or the module, and
you risk losing data:
a. The computer is turned on.
b. The computer was shut down using either Standby Mode or
Hibernation Mode.
c. Wake-up on LAN is enabled.
■ Be careful not to let screws or other foreign matter fall into the
computer. It could cause malfunction or electric shock.
■ Expansion memory is a precision electronic component that may be
fatally damaged by static electricity. Since the human body can carry
static electricity, it is important that you discharge yourself before
touching or installing any expansion memory modules. To discharge
your body’s static electricity, simply touch any metal close to you with
bare hands.
If you install a memory module that is not compatible with the computer,
the power LED will flashes (on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.5 seconds) in the
following ways;
If there is only an error in Slot A: repeatedly flashes orange twice, then
green.
If there is only an error in Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange, then green
twice.
If there is an error in Slot A and in Slot B: repeatedly flashes orange twice,
then green twice.
Use a #0 point Phillips screwdriver to remove and fasten the screws. Use
of an incorrect screwdriver can damage the screw heads.
Downloaded
8-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Optional Devices
Installing a memory module
There are slots for two memory modules, one over the other. The
procedures are the same for installing either module.
1. Set the computer to boot mode and turn the computer’s power off.
Make sure the Power indicator is off. Refer to the Turning off the power
section in Chapter 3, Getting Started.
2. Remove AC adaptor and all cables connected to the computer.
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack. Refer to
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes, for details.
4. Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover. The screw is
attached to the cover to prevent it from being lost.
5. Insert your fingernail or a thin and flat object under the cover and lift it
off.
Screw
Memory module
cover
Figure 8-5 Removing the memory module cover
6. Align the notch of the memory module with that of the memory slot and
gently insert the module into the slot at about a 45 degree angle before
pressing it down until the latches on either side snap into place.
Memory module
Slot A
Slot B
Figure 8-6 Seating the memory module
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-7
Optional Devices
Align the grooves along the edges of the memory module with the locking
tabs on the connector and insert the module into the connector firmly. If
you find it difficult to install the memory module, gently prize the locking
tabs outwards using the tip of your finger. Ensure that you hold the
memory module along its left and right hand edges - the edges with the
grooves in.
■ Never allow metal objects, such as screws, staples and paper clips, to
enter the PC or keyboard. Foreign metal objects can create a short
circuit, which can cause PC damage and fire, possibly resulting in
serious injury.
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access
problems.
7. Seat the memory module cover and secure it with one screw.
Be sure that the cover is closed firmly.
Screw
Memory module
cover
Figure 8-7 Seating the memory module cover
8. Install the battery pack. Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, for details.
9. Turn your computer over.
10. Turn the power on and make sure the added memory is recognized.
Click start, click Control Panel, click Performance and Maintenance
and select the System icon. Open System Properties window and
click General tab.
Removing a memory module
To remove the memory module, make sure the computer is in boot mode
then:
1. Set the computer to boot mode and turn the computer’s power off.
Make sure the Power indicator is off.
2. Remove AC adaptor and all cables connected to the computer.
Downloaded
8-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Optional Devices
3. Turn the computer upside down and remove the battery pack. Refer to
Replacing the battery pack section in Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes, for details.
4. Loosen the screw securing the memory module cover. The screw is
attached to the cover to prevent it from being lost.
5. Insert your fingernail or a thin and flat object into the slit and lift it off.
6. Push the latches to the outside to release the module. A spring will
force one end of the module up.
7. Grasp the module by the sides and pull it out.
■ If you use the computer for a long time, the memory modules and the
circuits located close to the memory modules will become hot. In this
case, let them cool to room temperature before you replace them.
■ Do not touch the connectors on the memory module or on the
computer. Debris on the connectors may cause memory access
problems.
Latches
Figure 8-8 Removing the memory module
8. Seat the memory module cover and secure it with one screw.
Be sure that the cover is closed firmly.
9. Install the battery pack. Refer to Replacing the battery pack section in
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes, for details.
10. Turn your computer over.
Battery pack
You can increase the portability of the computer with additional battery
packs. If you’re away from an AC power source and your battery runs low,
you can replace it with a freshly charged battery. Refer to Chapter 6, Power
and Power-Up Modes.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-9
Optional Devices
AC adaptor
If you frequently transport the computer between different sites such as
your home and office, purchasing an AC adaptor for each location will
reduce the weight and bulk of your carrying load.
Battery charger
The battery charger provides a convenient way to charge battery packs
without requiring the use of your computer. The battery charger holds up to
two battery packs (lithium ion).
USB floppy disk drive
The USB floppy disk drive module can be connected to the USB port. For
details on connecting the USB floppy disk drive module, refer to Chapter 4,
Operating Basics.
External monitor
An external analog monitor can be connected to the external monitor port
on the computer. The computer supports WXGA video modes. To connect
a monitor, follow the steps below.
1. Turn the computer’s power off.
2. Connect the monitor cable to the external monitor port and tighten the
screws on the left and right hand side.
External monitor
port
Monitor cable
Figure 8-15 Connecting the monitor cable to the external monitor port
Downloaded
8-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Optional Devices
3. Turn the monitor’s power on.
4. Turn the computer’s power on.
When you turn on the power, the computer automatically recognizes the
monitor and determines whether it is color or monochrome.
However, the Windows Desktop appears on a display device that you used
last time to shut down your computer, if the display device exists when you
turn on the power.
To change the display settings, press Fn + F5. If you disconnect the
external monitor before you turn the computer’s power off, be sure to press
Fn + F5 to switch to the internal display. Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard,
for details on using hot keys to change the display setting.
TV
You can connect a television set to the Video out jack on the computer.
Follow the steps below.
Depending on the model, the Video out jack (TV-out) is not present.
Using the TOSHIBA Assist button or TOSHIBA Presentation
button
1. Connect the TV adaptor cable’s S-Video plug to the Video-out jack on
the computer.
TV adaptor cable’s
S-Video plug
Video-out jack
Figure 8-16 Connecting the S-Video cable to the Video-out jack
2. Connect the TV adaptor cable’s S-Video plug to the Video-out jack on
the TV.
3. Press the TOSHIBA Assist button or TOSHIBA Presentation button.
You can use the hot keys Fn + F5 to change the display device. Refer to
Chapter 5, The Keyboard.
To open "TOSHIBA Controls" properties, click Start, click Control Panel,
and click Printers and Other Hardware, select "TOSHIBA Controls", and
set "TV OUT" to "TOSHIBA Assist button" or "TOSHIBA Presentation
button" on "Buttons" tab.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-11
Optional Devices
If a television is connected to the computer (Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo
Processor model), set the TV type in Display Properties. Follow the steps
below.
a. Click start and click Control Panel.
b. Double-click the Display icon to open the Display Properties
window.
c. Click the Settings tab and click the Advanced button.
d. Click the Intel® Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile
tab.
e. Click the Graphics Properties button.
f. Select Television in the Display Devices tab.
g. Select the TV format from the Video Standard pull down menu in
the Display Setting tab.
When a television is connected to the computer (Intel® Celeron® M
Processor model), the TV type is set using the Display Properties by
following the below procedure.
a. Hold down the Fn key and press the F5 key four times.
The display device selection menu is displayed, and "TV and
internal LCD" (display both) is selected.
b. Release Fn key.
c. Click start and click Control Panel.
d. Double-click the Display icon to open the Display Properties
window.
e. Click the Settings tab and click the Advanced button.
f. Click the CATALYST(R) Control Center tab.
g. Click the ATI CATALYST(R) Control Center button.
h. Click the TV Properties 2 icon in the “Graphic Settings”.
i. Click the Format icon in the TV Properties 2.
j. Select the TV type from the pull down menu of the Signal format.
Changing the resolution
After you connect a TV, follow the steps below to set the Display resolution.
1. Open Display properties and select the Settings tab.
2. Select Advanced.
3. Select the Adapter tab, then select List All Modes.
4. Select 1024 by 768, True Color (32 bit), 60 Hertz.
Downloaded
8-12
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Optional Devices
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
i.LINK (IEEE1394) is used for high-speed data transfer for a range of
compatible devices such as
■ Digital video cameras
■ Hard disk drives
■ MO drives
■ Writable optical disc drives
i.LINK uses a four-pin connector, which does not carry any electric current.
External devices will need their own power supply to operate.
Precautions
■ Make a back-up of your data before transferring it to the computer.
There is a possibility that the original data will be damaged. There is a
particular risk that some frames will be deleted in the case of digital
video transfer. TOSHIBA assumes no liability for such loss of data.
■ Do not transfer data in areas where static electricity is easily generated
or in areas subjected to electronic noise. Data can be destroyed.
■ If you are transferring data through an IEEE1394 hub, do not connect or
disconnect other devices from the hub during data transfer. There is a
likelihood that data will be damaged. Connect all devices to the hub
before you turn on the computer’s power.
■ You may not use any copyrighted video or music data copied from a
video camera except for your personal enjoyment.
■ If you connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK
device that is currently exchanging data with the computer, data frames
might be dropped.
■ Make sure data transfer has ended or turn off the computer, before you:
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from the computer.
■ Connect/disconnect an i.LINK device to/from another i.LINK device
that is connected to the computer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-13
Optional Devices
Connecting
1. Make sure the connectors are properly aligned and plug the i.LINK
(IEEE1394) cable into the computer.
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
port
i.LINK (IEEE1394)
connector
Figure 8-17 Connecting the i.LINK (IEEE1394) cable into the computer
2. Plug the other end of the cable into the device.
Note the following when you use i.LINK:
■ You may need to install drivers for your i.LINK devices.
■ Not all i.LINK devices have been tested. Therefore, compatibility with all
i.LINK devices cannot be guaranteed.
■ Some devices might not support standby or automatic off functions.
■ Do not connect or disconnect an i.LINK device while it is using an
application or when the computer is automatically shutting it down to
save power. Data might be destroyed.
Disconnecting
1. Open the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the Task Bar.
2. Point to i.LINK (IEEE1394) device and click.
3. Disconnect the cable from the computer then from the i.LINK device.
Refer also to the documentation that came with your i.LINK device.
Downloaded
8-14
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Optional Devices
Advanced Port Replicator III Plus
In addition to the ports available on the computer, the Advanced Port
Replicator III Plus provides serial port and separate ports for PS/2 mouse
and PS/2 keyboard. The Advanced Port Replicator III Plus connects
directly to the docking interface on the underside of the computer. The AC
adaptor connects the Advanced Port Replicator III Plus to a power source.
■ When connecting your computer to the Advanced Port Replicator III
Plus, aline the arrow mark on your computer to the one on the
Advanced Port Replicator III Plus.
Arrow mark
■ The computer must be configured properly before connecting to a LAN.
Logging onto a LAN using the computer’s default settings could cause
a malfunction in LAN operation. Check with your LAN administrator
regarding set-up procedures.
■ You must connect the AC adaptor before you connect to an Advanced
Port Replicator III Plus.
■ When an Advanced Port Replicator III Plus is connected to the
computer, you can not use the following computer’s ports: Modem jack,
LAN jack, DC IN 15V jack, External monitor port, i.LINK (IEEE 1394)
port, Video-out jack.
■ Only the Advanced Port Replicator III plus can be used with this
product (PC). Do not attempt to use any other Port Replicator.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-15
Optional Devices
The following ports and accessories are available on the Advanced Port
Replicator III Plus.
■ RJ45 LAN jack
■ RJ11 Modem jack
■ External monitor port
■ Parallel port
■ Serial port
■ PS/2 mouse port
■ PS/2 keyboard port
■ DC IN 15V jack
■ Security lock slot
■ Audio line-in, line-out jacks
■ Universal Serial Bus 2.0 port (four)
■ i.LINK (IEEE 1394) port
■ DVI port (This port is not supported by the computer.)
As the port operation of all DVI (Digital Visual Interface) monitors has not
been confirmed, some DVI monitors may not function properly.
Serial port
The serial connector can be used to connect to RS-232C compatible
devices.
RS-232C compatible devices include the following:
■ Modem
■ Mouse
To connect a serial port, follow the steps below.
1. Turn the computer’s power off.
2. Connect the serial connector to the serial port and tighten the screws on
the left and right hand side.
Serial connector
Serial port
Figure 8-18 Connecting the serial connector to the serial port
Downloaded
8-16
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Optional Devices
Security lock
Security locks enable you to anchor your computer and optional Advanced
Port Replicator III Plus to a desk or other heavy object to help prevent
unauthorized removal of the computer or Advanced Port Replicator III Plus.
The computer has a security lock slot on the left side. Attach one end of a
cable to a desk and the other end to the security lock slot.
1. Turn the computer so the left side faces you.
2. Align the holes for the security lock and attach the lock.
Security lock slot
Security lock cable
Figure 8-19 Security lock
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
8-17
Optional Devices
Downloaded
8-18
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
TOSHIBA designed the computer for durability. However, should problems
occur, following the procedures in this chapter can help to determine the
cause.
All readers should become familiar with this chapter. Knowing what might
go wrong can help prevent problems from occurring.
Problem solving process
Resolving problems will be much easier if you observe the following
guidelines:
■ Stop immediately when you recognize a problem exists. Further action
may result in data loss or damage. You may destroy valuable problemrelated information that can help solve the problem.
■ Observe what is happening. Write down what the system is doing and
what actions you performed immediately before the problem occurred.
If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the screen using PrtSc.
The questions and procedures offered in this chapter are meant as a guide,
they are not definitive problem solving techniques. Many problems can be
solved simply, but a few may require help from your dealer. If you find you
need to consult your dealer or others, be prepared to describe the problem
in as much detail as possible.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-1
Troubleshooting
Preliminary checklist
Consider the simplest solution first. The items in this checklist are easy to
fix and yet can cause what appears to be a serious problem.
■ Make sure you turn on all peripheral devices before you turn on the
computer. This includes your printer and any other external device you
are using.
■ Before you attach an external device, turn the computer off. When you
turn the computer back on it recognizes the new device.
■ Make sure all options are set properly in the setup program.
■ Check all cables. Are they correctly and firmly attached? Loose cables
can cause signal errors.
■ Inspect all connecting cables for loose wires and all connectors for
loose pins.
■ Check that your floppy disk or CD/DVD-ROM is correctly inserted and
that the floppy disk’s write protect tab is correctly set.
Make notes of your observations and keep them in a permanent error log.
This will help you describe your problems to your dealer. If a problem
recurs, the log will help you identify the problem faster.
Analyzing the problem
Sometimes the system gives clues that can help you identify why it is
malfunctioning. Keep the following questions in mind:
■ Which part of the system is not operating properly: keyboard, floppy
disk drives, hard disk drive, optical disk drive, display. Each device
produces different symptoms.
■ Is the operating system configuration set properly? Check the
configuration options.
■ What appears on the display screen? Does it display any messages or
random characters? If you have a printer attached, print a copy of the
screen using PrtSc. Look up the messages in the software and
operating system documentation. Check that all connecting cables are
correctly and firmly attached. Loose cables can cause erroneous or
intermittent signals.
■ Do any indicators light? Which ones? What color are they? Do they stay
on or blink? Write down what you see.
■ Do you hear any beeps? How many? Are they long or short? Are they
high pitched or low? Is the computer making any unusual noises? Write
down what you hear.
Record your observations so you can describe them to your dealer.
Downloaded
9-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Software
Hardware
The problems may be caused by your software or disk. If
you cannot load a software package, the media may be
damaged or the program might be corrupted. Try loading
another copy of the software.
If an error message appears while you are using a software
package, check the software documentation. These
documents usually include a problem solving section or a
summary of error messages.
Next, check any error messages in the operating system
documentation.
If you cannot find a software problem, check your
hardware. First run through the items in the preliminary
checklist above. If you still cannot correct the problem, try
to identify the source. The next section provides checklists
for individual components and peripherals.
Before using a peripheral device or application software that is not an
authorized Toshiba part or product, make sure the device or software can
be used with your PC. Use of incompatible devices may cause injury or
may damage your PC.
Hardware and system checklist
This section discusses problems caused by your computer’s hardware or
attached peripherals. Basic problems may occur in the following areas:
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
System start-up
Self test
Power
Password
Keyboard
Internal LCD display panel
Hard disk drive
CD-ROM drive
DVD-ROM drive
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive
DVD Super Multi drive
USB floppy disk drive
SD card
PC card
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Dual Pointing Device
Fingerprint Sensor
USB device
Bios Beep Sounds
Memory expansion
Sound system
External monitor
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device
Modem
LAN
Wireless LAN
Bluetooth
Printer
TV output signal
System start-up
When the computer does not start properly, check the following items:
■ Self Test
■ Power Sources
■ Power-on Password
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-3
Troubleshooting
Self test
When the computer starts up, the self test will be run automatically, and the
following will be displayed:
S
In Touch with Tomorrow
TOSHIBA
This message remains on the screen for a few seconds.
If the self test is successful, the computer tries to load the operating
system, depending on how the Boot Priority is set in the TOSHIBA HW
Setup program.
If any of the following conditions are present, the self test failed:
■ The computer stops and does not proceed to display information or
messages except the TOSHIBA logo.
■ Random characters appear on the screen, and the system does not
function normally.
■ The screen displays an error message.
Turn off the computer and check all cable connections. If the test fails
again, contact your dealer.
Power
When the computer is not plugged into an AC outlet, the battery pack is the
primary power source. However, your computer has a number of other
power resources, including an intelligent power supply and a Real Time
Clock battery. These resources are interrelated and any one could affect
apparent power problems. This section provides checklists for AC power
and the battery. If you cannot resolve a problem after following them, the
cause could lie with another power resource. In such case, contact your
dealer.
Overheating power down
If the computer’s internal temperature becomes too high, the computer will
automatically enter Hibernation or Standby Mode and shut down.
Problem
Procedure
Computer shuts down
and DC IN indicator
blinks orange
Leave the computer off until the DC IN indicator
stops blinking.
It is recommended to leave the computer off until the interior reaches room
temperature even though the DC IN indicator stops blinking.
Downloaded
9-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
If the computer has reached room temperature
and still does not start, or if it starts but shuts
down quickly contact your dealer.
Computer shuts down
and its DC IN indicator
is flashing green
Indicates a problem with the heat dispersal
system. Please contact your dealer.
AC power
If you have trouble turning on the computer with the AC adaptor connected,
check the DC IN indicator. Refer to Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up
Modes for more information.
Problem
Procedure
AC adaptor doesn’t
power the computer
(DC IN indicator does
not glow green)
Check the connections. Make sure the cord is
firmly connected to the computer and a power
outlet.
Check the condition of the cord and terminals. If
the cord is frayed or damaged, replace it. If the
terminals are soiled, wipe them with cotton or a
clean cloth.
If the AC adaptor still does not power the
computer, contact your dealer.
Battery
If you suspect a problem with the battery, check the DC IN indicator as well
as the Battery indicator. For information on indicators and battery
operation see Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.
Problem
Procedure
Battery doesn’t power
the computer
The battery may be discharged. Connect the AC
adaptor to charge the battery.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-5
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
Battery doesn’t charge
when the AC adaptor
is attached (Battery
indicator does not
glow orange.)
If the battery is completely discharged, it will not
begin charging immediately. Wait a few minutes.
If the battery still does not charge, make sure the
outlet of the AC adaptor is supplying power.
Test it by plugging in an appliance.
Check whether the battery is hot or cold to the
touch. If the battery is too hot or too cold, it will
not charge properly. Let it reach room
temperature.
Unplug the AC adaptor and remove the battery to
make sure the terminals are clean. If necessary
wipe them with a soft dry cloth dipped in alcohol.
Connect the AC adaptor and replace the battery.
Make sure it is securely seated.
Check the Battery indicator. If it does not glow,
let the computer charge the battery for at least 20
minutes. If the Battery indicator glows after 20
minutes, let the battery continue to charge at
least another 20 minutes before turning on the
computer.
If the indicator still does not glow, the battery may
be at the end of its operating life. Replace it.
If you do not think the battery is at the end of its
operating life, see your dealer.
Battery doesn’t power
the computer as long
as expected
If you frequently recharge a partially charged
battery, the battery might not charge to its full
potential. Fully discharge the battery, then try to
charge it again.
Check the power consumption settings in
TOSHIBA Power Saver utility. Consider using a
power saving mode.
Downloaded
9-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Real Time Clock
Problem
Procedure
The following
message is Displayed
on the LCD screen:
RTC battery is
low or CMOS
checksum is
inconsistent.
Press [F1] key to
set Date/Time.
The charge in the RTC battery has run out - you
will need to set the date and time in the BIOS
setup using the following steps:
1. Press F1 key. BIOS setup will boot up.
2. Set the date in System Date.
3. Set the time in System Time.
4. Press End key. Confirmation message will
appear.
5. Press Y key. BIOS setup will terminate and
the computer will be rebooted.
Password
Problem
Procedure
Cannot enter
password
Refer to the TOSHIBA Password Utility section in
Chapter 6, Power and Power-Up Modes.
Keyboard
Keyboard problems can be caused by your setup configuration. For more
information refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard.
Problem
Procedure
Some letter keys
produce numbers
Check that the numeric keypad overlay is not
selected. Press Fn + F10 and try typing again.
Output to screen is
garbled
Make sure the software you are using is not
remapping the keyboard. Remapping involves
reassigning the meaning of each key. See your
software’s documentation.
If you are still unable to use the keyboard,
consult your dealer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-7
Troubleshooting
Internal LCD display panel
Apparent LCD problems may be related to the computer’s setup. Refer to
Chapter 7, HW Setup, for more information.
Problem
Procedure
No display
Press hotkeys Fn + F5 to change the display
priority, to make sure it is not set for an external
monitor.
Markings appear on the The marks may have come from contact with the
LCD screen.
keyboard, Touch Pad or AccuPoint. Try wiping
the LCD screen gently with a clean dry cloth. If
markings remain, use a good quality LCD screen
cleaner, taking care to ensure you let the LCD
screen dry before closing it.
Problems above
remain unresolved or
other problems occur
Refer to your software’s documentation to
determine if the software is causing the difficulty.
Run the diagnostic test.
Contact your dealer if the problems continue.
Hard disk drive
Problem
Procedure
Computer does not
boot from hard disk
drive
Check if a floppy disk is in the floppy disk drive or
a CD-ROM is in the optical disk drive. Remove
any floppy disk and/or CD-ROM and check the
Boot priority. Refer to the Boot Priority section in
Chapter 7, HW Setup.
There may be a problem with your operating
system files. Refer to your operating system
documentation.
Slow performance
Your files may be fragmented. Run Disk
Defragmenter to check the condition of your files
and disk. Refer to your operating system’s
documentation or online HELP for information on
running the Disk Defragmenter.
As a last resort, reformat the hard disk. Then,
reload the operating system and other files.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Downloaded
9-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
CD-ROM drive
Problem
Procedure
You cannot access a
CD in the drive
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely
closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.
Check whether the drive power is on. If the
power is off, click on the optical disk drive icon in
the task tray and turn on the power.
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD is
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label
facing up.
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.
Check whether the CD is dirty. If it is, wipe it with
a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral cleaner.
Refer to the Media care section in Chapter 4 for
details on cleaning.
Some CDs run
The software or hardware configuration may be
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware
not
configuration matches your software’s needs.
Check the CD’s documentation.
Check the type of CD you are using. The drive
supports:
CD-ROM:
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM
(single/multi-session), CDROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CDROM XA Mode 2 (Form1,
Form2), Enhanced CD (CDEXTRA), Addressing Method 2
Recordable CD: CD-R, CD-RW
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-9
Troubleshooting
DVD-ROM drive
Problem
Procedure
You cannot access a
CD/DVD in the drive
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely
closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.
Check whether the drive power is on. If the
power is off, click on the optical disk drive icon in
the task tray and turn on the power.
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label
facing up.
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.
Some CD/DVDs run
The software or hardware configuration may be
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware
not
configuration matches your software’s needs.
Check the CD/DVD’s documentation.
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The
drive supports:
DVD-ROM:
DVD-ROM, DVD-Video
CD-ROM:
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM
(single/multi-session), CDROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CDROM XA Mode 2 (Form1,
Form2), Enhanced CD (CDEXTRA), Addressing Method 2
Check the region code on the DVD. It must
match that on the DVD-RO drive. Region codes
are listed in the Optical disk drives section in
Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.
Downloaded
9-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
You cannot access a
CD/DVD in the drive
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely
closed. Press gently until it clicks into place.
Check whether the drive power is on. If the
power is off, click on the optical disk drive icon in
the task tray and turn on the power.
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label
facing up.
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.
The software or hardware configuration may be
Some CD/DVDs run
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware
configuration matches your software’s needs.
not
Check the CD/DVD’s documentation.
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The
drive supports:
DVD-ROM:
DVD-ROM, DVD-Video
CD-ROM:
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CD
(single/multi-session), CDROM Mode 1, Mode 2, CDROM XA Mode 2 (Form1,
Form2), Enhanced CD (CDEXTRA), Addressing Method 2
Recordable CD: CD-R, CD-RW
Check the region code on the DVD. It must
match that on the DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive.
Region codes are listed in the Optical disk drives
section in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-11
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
Cannot write correctly
If you have trouble writing, make sure you are
observing the following precautions:
■ Use only media recommended by TOSHIBA.
■ Do not use the mouse or keyboard during
writing.
■ Use only the software supplied with the
computer for recording.
■ Do not run or start other software during
writing.
■ Do not jar the computer during writing.
■ Do not connect/disconnect external devices
or install/remove internal cards during writing.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
DVD Super Multi drive
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
You cannot access
a CD/DVD in the drive
Make sure the drive’s disc tray is securely
closed.
Press gently until it clicks into place.
Check whether the drive power is on. If the
power is off, click on the optical disk drive icon in
the task tray and turn on the power.
Open the disc tray and make sure the CD/DVD is
properly seated. It should lie flat with the label
facing up.
A foreign object in the disc tray could block laser
light from reading the CD/DVD. Make sure there
is no obstruction. Remove any foreign object.
Check whether the CD/DVD is dirty. If it is, wipe it
with a clean cloth dipped in water or a neutral
cleaner. Refer to the Media care section in
Chapter 4 for details on cleaning.
Some CD/DVDs run
The software or hardware configuration may be
correctly, but others do causing a problem. Make sure the hardware
not
configuration matches your software’s needs.
Check the CD/DVD's documentation.
Downloaded
9-12
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Check the type of CD/DVD you are using. The
drive supports:
DVD-ROM: DVD-ROM, DVD-Video
CD-ROM:
CD-DA, CD-Text, Photo CDTM
(single/multi-session), CD-ROM
Mode 1, Mode 2, CD-ROM XA
Mode 2 (Form1, Form2), Enhanced
CD (CD-EXTRA), Addressing
Method 2
Check the region code on the DVD. It must
match that on the DVD Super Multi drive. Region
codes are listed in the Optical disk drives section
in Chapter 2, The Grand Tour.
USB floppy disk drive
For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
Drive does not operate There may be a faulty cable connection. Check
the connection to the computer and to the drive.
Some programs run
correctly but others do
not
The software or hardware configuration may be
causing a problem. Make sure the hardware
configuration matches your software needs.
You cannot access the
external 3 1/2" floppy
disk drive
Try another floppy disk. If you can access the
floppy disk, the original floppy disk (not the drive)
is probably causing the problem.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
SD card
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.
Problem
Procedure
SD card error occurs
Reseat the SD card to make sure it is firmly
connected.
Check the card’s documentation.
You cannot write to an
SD memory card
Make sure the card is not write protected.
You cannot read a file
Make sure the target file is on the SD memory
card inserted in the slot.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-13
Troubleshooting
PC card
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices.
Problem
Procedure
PC card error occurs
Reseat the PC card to make sure it is firmly
connected.
Make sure the connection between the external
device and the PC card is firm.
Check the PC card’s documentation.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Dual Pointing Device
If you are using a USB mouse, also refer to the USB device section in this
chapter and to your mouse documentation.
Touch Pad/AccuPoint
Downloaded
9-14
Problem
Procedure
Either the Touch Pad
or the AccuPoint does
not work.
Check the Device Select settings. Click start,
click Control Panel, click Printers and Other
Hardware and select Mouse icon. Open the
Mouse Properties and click Dual Pointing
Device tab. Then click the Detail Setting button
and click the Device Select tab.
Check that the Touch Pad is not selected.
Pressing Fn + F9 to enables TOSHIBA Dual
Pointing Device.
On-screen pointer
does not respond to
Pad operation
The system might be busy. If the pointer is
shaped as an hourglass, wait for it to return to its
normal shape and try again to move it.
The mouse pointer
moves too fast or too
slow
Try changing the speed setting in the mouse
control utility.
1. Click start, click Control Panel, click
Printers and Other Hardware and select
Mouse icon.
2. Click the Pointer Options tab.
3. Set the speed as required and click OK.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Problem
Procedure
Double-tapping
(Touch Pad) or
double-clicking
(AccuPoint) does not
work
Try changing the double-click speed setting in
the mouse control utility.
1. Click start, click Control Panel, click
Printers and Other Hardware and select
Mouse icon.
2. Click the Buttons tab.
3. Set the double-click speed as required and
click OK.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
USB mouse
Problem
Procedure
On-screen pointer
does not respond to
mouse operation
The system might be busy. If the pointer is
shaped as an hourglass, wait for it to resume its
normal shape and try again to move it.
Make sure the mouse is properly connected to
the USB port.
Double-clicking does
not work
Try changing the double-click speed setting in
the mouse control utility.
1. Click start, click Control Panel, click
Printers and Other Hardware and select
Mouse icon.
2. Click the Buttons tab.
3. Set the double-click speed as required and
click OK.
The mouse pointer
moves too fast or too
slow
Try changing the speed setting in the mouse
control utility.
1. Click start, click Control Panel, click
Printers and Other Hardware and select
Mouse icon.
2. Click the Pointer Options tab.
3. Set the speed as required and click OK.
The mouse pointer
moves erratically
The mouse might be dirty. Refer to your mouse
documentation for instructions on cleaning.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-15
Troubleshooting
Fingerprint Sensor
Problem
Procedure
Reading of the
fingerprint was not
successful.
Try again using the correct posture. Align your
fingertip with the sensor as shown in the drawing
and Swipe. Refer to Using the Fingerprint Sensor
in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.Try the
recognition process again using another enrolled
finger.
The fingerprint cannot
be read due to injuries
to the finger.
Try the recognition process again using another
enrolled finger.
If fingerprints from all the enrolled fingers cannot
be read, please logon by using the keyboard to
input the password for the time being.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
USB device
Refer also to your USB device’s documentation.
Problem
Procedure
USB device does not
work
Check for a firm cable connection between the
USB ports on the computer and the USB device.
Make sure the USB device drivers are properly
installed. Refer to your Windows XP
documentation for information on checking the
drivers.
If you are using an operating system that does
not support USB, you can still use a USB mouse
and/or USB keyboard. If these devices do not
work, make sure the USB KB/Mouse Legacy
Emulation item in HW Setup is set to Enabled.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Bios Beep Sounds
Problem
Procedure
Beep sounds
Beep volume can be set to High/Medium/Low/Off
using the Bios Setup Program. The Default is
Medium.
The volume for the loud beep sound that occurs
when there is a memory error cannot be
adjusted.
Downloaded
9-16
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Memory expansion
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices, for information on installing
memory modules.
Problem
Procedure
If there is a memory
malfunction, the power
LED flashes (on for
0.5 seconds, off for
0.5 seconds) in the
following ways;
If there is only an error
in Slot A: repeatedly
flashes orange twice,
then green.
If there is only an error
in Slot B: repeatedly
flashes orange, then
green twice.
If there is an error in
Slot A and in Slot B:
repeatedly flashes
orange twice, then
green twice
Make sure the memory module installed in the
memory slot is compatible with the computer.
If an incompatible module has been installed,
follow the steps below.
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC adaptor and all peripheral
devices.
3. Remove the battery pack.
4. Remove the memory module.
5. Install the battery and/or connect the AC
adaptor.
6. Turn on the power.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Sound system
Refer also to documentation for your audio devices.
Problem
Procedure
No sound is heard
Adjust the volume control dial.
Check the software volume settings.
Make sure the headphone connection is secure.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Check Windows Device Manager. Make sure the
sound function is enabled and that settings for I/
O address, Interrupt level and DMA are correct
for your software and do not conflict with other
hardware devices that you may have connected
to the computer.
Annoying sound
is heard
You may be experiencing feedback. Refer to
Sound system in Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-17
Troubleshooting
External monitor
Refer also to Chapter 8, Optional Devices, and to your monitor’s
documentation.
Problem
Procedure
Monitor does not turn
on
Make sure that the external monitor’s power
switch is on. Confirm that the external monitor’s
power cable is plugged into a working power
outlet.
No display
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls
on the external monitor.
Press hot keys Fn + F5 to change the display
priority and make sure it is not set for the internal
LCD.
Display error occurs
Check that the cable connecting the external
monitor to the computer is attached firmly.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
i.LINK (IEEE1394) device
Problem
Procedure
i.LINK device does not
function
Make sure the cable is securely connected to the
computer and to the device.
Make sure the device’s power is turned on.
Reinstall the drivers. Open the Windows
Control Panel and double-click the Add
Hardware icon. Follow the on-screen
directions.
Restart Windows.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Downloaded
9-18
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Modem
Refer to Appendix C, AT Commands and Appendix D, S-registers.
Problem
Procedure
Communication
software can’t initialize
modem
Make sure the computer’s internal modem
settings are correct. Refer to Phone and Modem
Properties in the Control Panel.
You can hear a dial
tone but can’t make a
call
If the call is going through a PBX machine, make
sure the communication application’s tone dial
detection feature is disabled.
You can also use the ATX command. Refer to
Appendix C, AT Commands.
You place a call, but a
connection can’t be
made
Make sure the settings are correct in your
communications application.
After making a call you
can’t hear a ring
Make sure the tone or pulse selection in your
communications application is set correctly.
You can also use the ATD command. Refer to
Appendix C, AT Commands.
Communication is cut
off unexpectedly
The computer will automatically cut off
communication when connection with the carrier
is not successful for a set time interval. Try
lengthening this time interval.
A CONNECT display is
quickly replaced by NO
CARRIER
Check the error control setting in your
communications application.
You can also use the AT\N command. Refer to
Appendix C, AT Commands.
Character display
becomes garbled
during a
communication
session
In data transmission, make sure the parity bit and
stop bit settings correspond with those of the
remote computer.
Check the flow control and communication
protocol.
You cannot receive an
incoming call
Check the rings before auto answer setting in
your communications application.
You can also use the ATS0 command. Refer to
Appendix D, S-registers.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-19
Troubleshooting
LAN
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access LAN
Check for a firm cable connection between the
LAN jack and the LAN hub.
Wake-up on LAN does
not work
Make sure the AC adaptor is connected. The
Wake-up on LAN function consumes power even
when the system is off.
If problems persist, consult your LAN
administrator.
Wireless LAN
If the following procedures do not restore LAN access, consult your LAN
administrator. For more information on wireless communication, refer to
Chapter 4, Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access
Wireless LAN
Make sure the computer’s wireless
communication switch is set to on.
If problems persist, contact your LAN
administrator.
Bluetooth
For more information on wireless communication, refer to Chapter 4,
Operating Basics.
Problem
Procedure
Cannot access
Bluetooth device
Make sure the computer’s wireless
communication switch is set to on.
Make sure the Bluetooth Manager is running and
the power to the Bluetooth device is turned on.
Make sure no optional Bluetooth PC card and
Bluetooth SD card are installed in the computer.
The built-in Bluetooth function and an optional
Bluetooth PC card cannot operate
simultaneously. If problems persist, contact your
dealer.
Downloaded
9-20
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
Printer
Refer also to the Serial port sections in Chapter 8, Optional Devices, and to
the troubleshooting and other relevant sections in your printer and software
documentation.
An Advanced Port Replicator III Plus is equipped with a parallel port.
Problem
Procedure
Printer does not turn on. Check that the printer is connected to an electric
outlet. Make sure the outlet is supplying power by
plugging in an appliance.
Computer/printer do not Make sure the printer is turned on and is online
communicate
(ready to use).
Inspect the cable connecting the printer to the
computer for damage. Make sure it is securely
connected.
A parallel printer connects to the parallel port.
Make sure the port is configured correctly.
Make sure your software is configured to
recognize the printer. Check your printer and
software documentation.
Printer error
Check your printer documentation.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
TV output signal
Problem
Procedure
Display on TV is poor
Make sure the TV type is correct for your area:
NTSC (US, JAPAN), PAL (Europe).
No display
Try adjusting the contrast and brightness controls
on the external monitor.
Press hotkeys Fn + F5 to change the display.
Refer to Chapter 5, The Keyboard.
If problems persist, contact your dealer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-21
Troubleshooting
Recovery Discs
Problem
Procedure
The following
message appears
when executing
Recovery Disc
Creator.
"The Recovery Disc
Creator can not be
launched because
there is no recovery
partition."
You will see this message if you have previously
chosen to remove the partition and are trying to
create "Recovery Media". When there is no
recovery partition, the Recovery Disc Creator
cannot make Recovery Media. However, if you
have already created a "Recovery Media", you
can use it to restore the recovery partition.
Simply follow the instructions in "Restoring the
preinstall software from your creating Recovery
Media" section in this manual. You will be
directed to select "Restore Original Factory
Image" from the drop-down menu. If you have
not created "Recovery Media", please contact
TOSHIBA support for assistance.
Disposing of PC and PC batteries
■ Discard this PC in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. For
further information, contact your local government.
■ This PC contains rechargeable batteries. After repeated use, the
batteries will finally lose their ability to hold a charge and you will need
to replace them. Under certain applicable laws and regulation, it may be
illegal to dispose of old batteries by placing them in the trash.
■ Please be kind to our shared environment. Check with your local
government authority for details regarding where to recycle old
batteries or how to dispose of them properly. This product contains
mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to
environmental considerations. For disposal, reuse or recycling
information, please contact your local government.
■ If your hard disk or other storage media contains sensitive data, you
should be aware that standard deletion procedures do not remove data
from the media. These standard deletion procedures include:
■ Selecting Delete for a target file
■ Putting files in the Recycle Bin and emptying the Recycle Bin
■ Reformatting the media
■ Reinstalling an operating system from the recovery CD-ROM
The procedures above delete only the initial part of the data used for file
management. This makes the file invisible to the operating system, but
the data can still be read by specialized utilities. If you dispose of the
PC, please delete all the data on its hard disk drive. Doing so prevents
unauthorized use of such data. To ensure your data is not used for
unauthorized purposes, you can:
■ Physically destroy the hard disk drive
■ Use a proven specialized utility to overwrite all data
■ Take the hard disk drive to a professional deletion service
Downloaded
9-22
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Troubleshooting
All data deletion costs will be borne by you.
TOSHIBA support
If you require any additional help using your computer or if you are having
problems operating the computer, you may need to contact TOSHIBA for
additional technical assistance.
Before you call
Some problems you experience may be related to software or the operating
system, it is important to investigate other sources of assistance first.
Before contacting TOSHIBA, try the following:
■ Review troubleshooting sections in the documentation for software and
peripheral devices.
■ If a problem occurs when you are running software applications, consult
the software documentation for troubleshooting suggestions. Call the
software company’s technical support for assistance.
■ Consult the dealer you purchased your computer and/or software from.
They are your best sources for current information and support.
Where to write
If you are still unable to solve the problem and suspect that it is hardware
related, write to TOSHIBA at the nearest location listed below:
Outside of Europe
In Europe
Australia
TOSHIBA Australia Pty. Ltd.
Information Systems Division
84-92 Talavera Road
North Ryde N.S.W. 2113
Sydney
Germany & Austria
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH
Geschäftsbereich,
Deutschland-Österreich
Hammfelddamm 8,
D-41460 Neuss, Germany
Canada
TOSHIBA of Canada Ltd.
191 McNabb Street,
Markham, Ontario
L3R 8H2
France
TOSHIBA Systèms France S.A.
7, Rue Ampère B.P. 131,
92804 Puteaux Cedex
China
TOSHIBA Personal Computer &
Network (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
43F, Hong Kong New World Tower,
No. 300 Huaihai Zhong Road,
Shanghai, P. R. China 200021
Netherlands
TOSHIBA Information Systems,
Benelux B.V.
Rivium Boulevard
41 2909 LK Capelle a/d IJssel
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
9-23
Troubleshooting
Outside of Europe
In Europe
Singapore
TOSHIBA Singapore Pte. Ltd.
438B Alexandra Road #06-01
Alexandra Technopark
Singapore 119968
Spain
TOSHIBA Information Systems,
ESPAÑA
Parque Empresarial San Fernando
Edificio Europa, la Planta,
Escalera A 28830 Madrid
United States of America
TOSHIBA America Information
Systems, Inc.
9740 Irvine Boulevard
Irvine, California 92618
USA
United Kingdom
TOSHIBA Information Systems
(U.K.) Ltd.
TOSHIBA Court
Weybridge Business Park
Addlestone Road
Weybridge, Surrey KT15 2UL
The Rest of Europe
TOSHIBA Europe (I.E.) GmbH
Geschäftsbereich,
Deutschland-Österreich
Hammfelddamm 8,
D-41460 Neuss, Germany
Downloaded
9-24
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Chapter 10
Legal Footnotes
This chapter states the Legal Footnote information applicable to TOSHIBA
computers. In the text in this manual, *XX is used to show which Legal
Footnote description is related to TOSHIBA computers.
Description(s) related to this computer are marked with a blue *XX in this
manual. Clicking on *XX will display the related description.
CPU*1
Central Processing Unit (“CPU”) Performance Legal Footnote.
CPU performance in your computer product may vary from specifications
under the following conditions:
■ use of certain external peripheral products
■ use of battery power instead of AC power
■ use of certain multimedia, computer generated graphics or video
applications
■ use of standard telephone lines or low speed network connections
■ use of complex modeling software, such as high end computer aided
design applications
■ use of several applications or functionalities simultaneously
■ use of computer in areas with low air pressure (high altitude >1,000
meters or >3,280 feet above sea level)
■ use of computer at temperatures outside the range of 5°C to 30°C
(41°F to 86°F) or >25°C (77°F) at high altitude (all temperature
references are approximate and may vary depending on the specific
computer model - please refer to your PC documentation or visit the
Toshiba website at www.pcsupport.toshiba.com for details).
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
10-1
Legal Footnotes
CPU performance may also vary from specifications due to design
configuration.
Under some conditions, your computer product may automatically shutdown. This is a normal protective feature designed to reduce the risk of lost
data or damage to the product when used outside recommended
conditions. To avoid risk of lost data, always make back-up copies of data
by periodically storing it on an external storage medium. For optimum
performance, use your computer product only under recommended
conditions. Read additional restrictions in your product documentation.
Contact Toshiba technical service and support, refer to TOSHIBA support
section in Chapter 9 Troubleshooting for more information.
General Main Memory*2
Part of the main system memory may be used by the graphics system for
graphics performance and therefore reduce the amount of main system
memory available for other computing activities. The amount of main
system memory allocated to support graphics may vary depending on the
graphics system, applications utilized, system memory size and other
factors. For PC's configured with 4 GB of system memory, the full system
memory space for computing activities will be considerably less and will
vary by model and system configuration.
Battery Life*3
Battery life may vary considerably depending on product model,
configuration, applications, power management settings and features
utilized, as well as the natural performance variations produced by the
design of individual components. Published battery life numbers are
achieved on select models and configurations tested by Toshiba at the time
of publication. Recharge time varies depending on usage. Battery may not
charge while computer is consuming full power.
After going through many charge and discharge cycles, the battery will lose
its ability to perform at maximum capacity and will need to be replaced.
This is a normal phenomenon for all batteries. To purchase a new battery
pack, see the accessories information that is shipped with your computer.
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Capacity*4
1 Gigabyte (GB) means 10 9 = 1,000,000,000 bytes using powers of 10.
The computer operating system, however, reports storage capacity using
powers of 2 for the definition of 1 GB = 230 = 1,073,741,824 bytes, and
therefore shows less storage capacity. Available storage capacity will also
be less if the product includes one or more pre-installed operating systems,
such as Microsoft Windows and/or pre-installed software applications, or
media content. Actual formatted capacity may vary.
Downloaded
10-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Legal Footnotes
LCD*5
Over a period of time, and depending on the usage of the computer, the
brightness of the LCD screen will deteriorate. This is an intrinsic
characteristic of LCD technology.
Maximum brightness is only available when operating in AC power mode.
The screen will dim when the computer is operated on battery power and
you may not be able to increase the brightness of the screen.
Graphics Processor Unit ("GPU")*6
Graphics processor unit ("GPU") performance may vary depending on
product model, design configuration, applications, power management
settings and features utilized. GPU performance is only optimized when
operating in AC power mode and may decrease considerably when
operating in battery power mode.
Wireless LAN*7
The transmission speed over the Wireless LAN and the distance over
which Wireless LAN can reach may vary depending on surrounding
electromagnetic environment, obstacles, access point design and
configuration, and client design and software/hardware configurations.
[54Mbps is the theoretical maximum speed under the IEEE802.11 (a/b/g)
standard.] The actual transmission speed will be lower than the theoretical
maximum speed.
Non-applicable Icons*8
Certain notebook chassis are designed to accommodate all possible
configurations for an entire product series. Therefore, please be aware that
your selected model may not have all the features and specifications
corresponding to all of the icons or switches shown on the notebook
chassis.
Copy Protection*9
Applicable copy protection standards Copy protection technology included
in certain media may prevent or limit recording or viewing of the media.
Images*10
All images are simulated for purposes of illustration.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
10-3
Legal Footnotes
Downloaded
10-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix A
Specifications
This appendix summarizes the computer’s technical specifications.
Physical Dimensions
Weight (typical)
Maximum 2.98 kilograms, configured with: 15.4"
WXGA, 1,024MB+1.024MB RAM, 100GB HDD,
DVD-Super Multi drive, Wireless LAN, Bluetooth.
Minimum 2.85 kilograms, configured with: 15.4"
WXGA, 256MB+0MB RAM, 40GB HDD,
CD-ROM drive.
Weight will vary with other configurations. Above
weights are measured at specific criteria. They
are not guaranteed as the maximum weight of
the actual product.
Size
368 (w) × 268 (d) × 29.8/36.9 (h) millimeters (not
including parts that extend beyond the main
body)
Environmental Requirements
Conditions
Ambient temperature
Relative humidity
Operating
5°C (41°F) to 35°C (95°F)
20% to 80%
Non-operating
-20°C (-4°F) to 65°C (149°F) 10% to 95%
Thermal Gradient
20°C per hour maximum
Wet-bulb
temperature
26°C maximum
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
A-1
Specifications
Conditions
Altitude (from sea level)
Operating
-60 to 3,000 meters
Non-operating
-60 to 10,000 meters
maximum
Power Requirements
AC adaptor
100-240 volts AC
50 or 60 hertz (cycles per second)
Computer
15 VDC
4.0 amperes
Built-in Modem
Network control unit (NCU)
Type of NCU
AA
Type of line
Telephone line (analog only)
Type of dialing
Pulse
Tone
Control command
AT commands
EIA-578 commands
Monitor function
Computer’s speaker
Communication specifications
Communication
system
Downloaded
A-2
Data:
Fax:
from LpManual.com Manuals
Full duplex
Half duplex
User’s Manual
Specifications
Network control unit (NCU)
Communication
protocol
Data
ITU-T-Rec
(Former CCITT)
Bell
Fax
ITU-T-Rec
(Former CCITT)
V.21/V.22/V.22bis/V.32
/V.32bis/V.34/V.90
103/212A
V.17/V.29/V.27ter
/V.21 ch2
Communication
speed
Data transmission and reception
300/1200/2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400/
16800/19200/21600/24000/26400/28800/31200/
33600 bps
Data reception only with V.90
28000/29333/30666/32000/33333/34666/36000/
37333/38666/40000/41333/42666/44000/45333/
46666/48000/49333/50666/52000/53333/54666/
56000 bps
Fax
2400/4800/7200/9600/12000/14400 bps
Transmitting level
-10 dBm
Receiving level
-10 to -40 dBm
Input/output
impedance
600 ohms ±30%
Error correcting
MNP class 4 and ITU-T V.42
Data compression
MNP class 5 and ITU-T V.42bis
Power supply
+3.3V (supplied by computer)
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
A-3
Specifications
Downloaded
A-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix B
Display Controller and Modes
Display controller
The display controller interprets software commands into hardware
commands that turn particular parts on the screen on or off.
■ 15.4" WXGA, 1280 horizontal × 800 vertical pixels
Because of the LCD’s increased resolution, lines may appear broken in
DOS mode.
A high-resolution external monitor connected to the computer can display
up to 2,048 horizontal and 1,536 vertical pixels at up to 16M colors.
The display controller also controls the video mode, which uses industry
standard rules to govern the screen resolution and the maximum number of
colors that can be displayed on screen.
Software written for a given video mode will run on any computer that
supports the mode.
Video modes
The computer supports video modes defined in the tables below. If your
application offers a selection of mode numbers that do not match the
numbers on the table, select a mode based on mode type, resolution,
character matrix, number of colors and refresh rates. Also, if your software
supports both graphics and text modes, the screen display may appear to
operate faster using a text mode.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
B-1
Display Controller and Modes
Table1 Video modes (VGA)
Video mode
Type
Resolution
Character
matrix
(pels)
Colors
Scanning
frequency
Vertical (Hz)
0, 1
VGA
Text
40 × 25
Characters
8×8
16 of 256K
70
2, 3
VGA
Text
80 × 25
Characters
8×8
16 of 256K
70
0*, 1*
VGA
Text
40 × 25
Characters
8 × 14
16 of 256K
70
2*, 3*
VGA
Text
80 × 25
Characters
8 × 14
16 of 256K
70
0+, 1+
VGA
Text
40 × 25
Characters
9 × 16
16 of 256K
70
2+, 3+
VGA
Text
80 × 25
Characters
9 × 16
16 of 256K
70
4, 5
VGA
Grph
320 × 200
Pels
8×8
4 of 256K
70
6
VGA
Grph
640 × 200
Pels
8×8
2 of 256K
70
7
VGA
Text
80 × 25
Characters
9 × 14
Mono
70
7+
VGA
Text
80 × 25
Characters
9 × 16
Mono
70
Downloaded
B-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Display Controller and Modes
Table1 Video modes (VGA) continued
Video
mode
Type
Resolution
Character
matrix
(pels)
Colors
Scanning
frequency
Vertical (Hz)
D
VGA
Grph
320 × 200
Pels
8×8
16 of 256K
70
E
VGA
Grph
640 × 200
Pels
8×8
16 of 256K
70
F
VGA
Grph
640 × 350
Pels
8 × 14
Mono
70
10
VGA
Grph
640 × 350
Pels
8 × 14
16 of 256K
70
11
VGA
Grph
640 × 480
Pels
8 × 16
2 of 256K
60
12
VGA
Grph
640 × 480
Pels
8 × 16
16 of 256K
60
13
VGA
Grph
320 × 200
Pels
8×8
256 of 256K
70
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
B-3
Display Controller and Modes
Table 2 Video modes (WXGA, Intel® Celeron® M Processor model)
Resolution
LCD
colors
CRT
colors
Vertical
frequency (Hz)*1
640 × 480
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
800 × 600
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1024 × 768
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1280 × 800
256/256K
256/256K
60
1280 × 1024
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1600 × 1200
(Virtual with LCD
only)
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1920 × 1440
(Virtual with LCD
only)
256/256K
256/256K
60
2048 × 1536
(Virtual with LCD
only)
256/256K
256/256K
60
*1
Only External Monitor can perform change of Vertical frequency (Hz).
Noise may appear if the screen is displayed in high resolution mode on a
simultaneous display or multi-monitor display while running 3D
applications, during DVD playback or so on. Reduce the resolution until the
screen is displayed properly in such cases.
Downloaded
B-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Display Controller and Modes
Table 2 Video modes (WXGA, Intel® Celeron® M Processor model) continued
Resolution
LCD
colors
CRT
colors
Vertical
frequency (Hz)*1
640 × 480
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
800 × 600
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1024 × 768
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1280 × 800
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
1280 × 1024
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1600 × 1200
(Virtual with LCD
only)
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1920 × 1440
(Virtual with LCD
only)
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
2048 × 1536
(Virtual with LCD
only)
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
*1 Only External Monitor can perform change of Vertical frequency (Hz).
Noise may appear if the screen is displayed in high resolution mode on a
simultaneous display or multi-monitor display while running 3D
applications, during DVD playback or so on. Reduce the resolution until the
screen is displayed properly in such cases.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
B-5
Display Controller and Modes
Table 2 Video modes (WXGA, Intel® Celeron® M Processor model) continued
Resolution
LCD
colors
CRT
colors
Vertical
frequency (Hz)*1
640 × 480
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
800 × 600
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1024 × 768
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1280 × 800
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
1280 × 1024
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1600 × 1200
(Virtual with LCD
only)
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1920 × 1440
(Virtual with LCD
only)
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
2048 × 1536
(Virtual with LCD
only)
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
*1 Only External Monitor can perform change of Vertical frequency (Hz).
Noise may appear if the screen is displayed in high resolution mode on a
simultaneous display or multi-monitor display while running 3D
applications, during DVD playback or so on. Reduce the resolution until the
screen is displayed properly in such cases.
Downloaded
B-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Display Controller and Modes
Table 3 Video modes (WXGA, Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo Processor model)
Resolution
LCD
colors
CRT
colors
Vertical
frequency (Hz)*1
640 × 480
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
800 × 600
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1024 × 768
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1280 × 800
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1280 × 1024
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1600 × 1200
(Virtual with LCD
only)
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
100
1920 × 1440
(Virtual with LCD
only)
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
85
2048 × 1536
(Virtual with LCD
only)
256/256K
256/256K
60
75
*1 Only External Monitor can perform change of Vertical frequency (Hz).
Noise may appear if the screen is displayed in high resolution mode on a
simultaneous display or multi-monitor display while running 3D
applications, during DVD playback or so on. Reduce the resolution until the
screen is displayed properly in such cases.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
B-7
Display Controller and Modes
Table 3 Video modes (WXGA, Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo Processor model) continued
Resolution
LCD
colors
CRT
colors
Vertical
frequency (Hz)*1
640 × 480
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
800 × 600
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1024 × 768
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1280 × 800
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1280 × 1024
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1600 × 1200
(Virtual with LCD
only)
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
100
1920 × 1440
(Virtual with LCD
only)
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
85
2048 × 1536
(Virtual with LCD
only)
64K/64K
64K/64K
60
75
*1 Only External Monitor can perform change of Vertical frequency (Hz).
Noise may appear if the screen is displayed in high resolution mode on a
simultaneous display or multi-monitor display while running 3D
applications, during DVD playback or so on. Reduce the resolution until the
screen is displayed properly in such cases.
Downloaded
B-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Display Controller and Modes
Table 3 Video modes (WXGA, Intel® CoreTM Duo/Solo Processor model) continued
Resolution
LCD
colors
CRT
colors
Vertical
frequency (Hz)*1
640 × 480
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
800 × 600
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1024 × 768
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1280 × 800
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1280 × 1024
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1600 × 1200
(Virtual with LCD
only)
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
100
1920 × 1440
(Virtual with LCD
only)
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
85
2048 × 1536
(Virtual with LCD
only)
16M/16M
16M/16M
60
75
*1 Only External Monitor can perform change of Vertical frequency (Hz).
Noise may appear if the screen is displayed in high resolution mode on a
simultaneous display or multi-monitor display while running 3D
applications, during DVD playback or so on. Reduce the resolution until the
screen is displayed properly in such cases.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
B-9
Display Controller and Modes
Downloaded
B-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix C
AT Commands
In most cases, you will not need to type AT commands manually. However,
there might be some occasions when you will need to do so.
This chapter describes AT commands for data mode. Fax and voice
commands are taken care of by application software.
The format for entering AT commands is:
ATXn
where X is the AT command, and n is the specific value for that command.
After you type in the command press Enter.
Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either text or
numeric values known as result codes.
All commands and command-values accepted by the modem are
described in this section; any entry other than those listed results in an
error.
+++ Escape sequence
The escape sequence allows the modem to exit data mode and enter online command mode. While in on-line command mode, you can
communicate directly to your modem using AT commands. Once you
finish, you can return to data mode using the ATO command.
A pause, the length of which is set by Escape Guard Time (S12), must be
completed after an escape sequence is entered. This pause prevents the
modem from interpreting the escape sequence as data.
The value of the escape sequence character may be changed using
register S2.
A/
Repeat last command
This command repeats the last command string entered. Do not precede
this command with an AT prefix or conclude it by pressing Enter.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
C-1
AT Commands
A
Answer command
This command instructs the modem to go off-hook and answer an incoming
call.
Bn
Communication standard setting
This command determines the communication standard CCITT or Bell.
B0
Selects CCITT V.22 mode when the modem is at 1200 bps.
B1
Selects Bell 212A when the modem is at 1200 bps (default).
B15 Selects V.21 when the modem is at 300 bps.
B16 Selects Bell 103J when the modem is at 300 bps (default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,15,16
ERROR Otherwise
Dn
Dial
This command instructs the modem to dial a telephone number. Enter n
(the telephone number and any modifiers) after the ATD command.
Any digit or symbol (0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D) may be dialed as touch-tone
digits. Characters such as spaces, hyphens, and parentheses do not count.
They are ignored by the modem, but you may want to include them to make
the number and modifiers easier to read.
The following may be used as phone number modifiers:
P
Pulse dialing.
T
Touch-tone dialing (default).
,
Pause during dialing. Pause for time specified in Register S8
before processing the next character in the dial string.
W
Wait for dial tone. Modem waits for a second dial tone before
processing the dial string.
@
Wait for quiet answer. Wait for five seconds of silence after
dialing the number. If silence is not detected, the modem
sends a NO ANSWER result code back to the caller.
!
Hook flash. Causes the modem to go on-hook for 0.5
seconds and then return to off-hook.
;
Return to command mode. Causes the modem to return to
command mode after dialing a number, without
disconnecting the call.
S=n Dial a telephone number previously stored using the &Zn=X
command (See &Zn=X command for more information). The
range is 0-3.
En
Echo command
This command controls whether or not the characters entered from your
computer keyboard are displayed on your monitor (echoed) while the
modem is in command mode.
Downloaded
C-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
AT Commands
E0
Disables echo to the computer.
E1
Enables echo to the computer (default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
Hn
Hook control
This command instructs the modem to go on-hook to disconnect a call, or
off-hook to make the phone line busy.
H0
Modem goes on-hook (default).
H1
Modem goes off-hook.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
In
Request ID information
This command displays product information about the modem.
I0
Returns modem identity string and driver version number.
I3
Same as I0.
I9
Returns region ID in English.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,3,9
ERROR Otherwise
Ln
Monitor speaker volume
This command sets speaker volume to low, medium, or high.
L0
Low volume.
L1
Low volume. (Same as L0)
L2
Medium volume (default).
L3
High volume.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3
ERROR Otherwise
Mn
Monitor speaker mode
This command turns the speaker on or off.
M0
The speaker is off.
M1
The speaker is on until the modem detects the carrier signal
(default).
M2
The speaker is always on when modem is off-hook.
M3
Speaker is on until the carrier is detected, except when
dialing.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
C-3
AT Commands
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3
ERROR Otherwise
Nn
Modulation handshake
This command controls whether or not the local modem performs a
negotiated handshake at connection time with the remote modem when the
communication speed of the two modems is different.
N0
When originating or answering, this is for handshake only at
the communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB
command.
N1
When originating or answering, begin the handshake at the
communication standard specified by S37 and the ATB
command (default).
During handshake, a lower transmission speed may be
selected.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
On
Return on-line to data mode
O0
Instructs the modem to exit on-line command mode and
return to data mode (see AT escape sequence, +++).
O1
This command issues a retrain before returning to on-line
data mode.
O3
This command issues a rate renegotiation before returning to
on-line data mode.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,3
ERROR Otherwise
P
Select pulse dialing
This command configures the modem for pulse (non touch-tone) dialing.
Dialed digits are pulsed until a T command or dial modifier is received.
Tone dial is the default setting.
Qn
Result code control
Result codes are informational messages sent from the modem and
displayed on your monitor. Basic result codes are OK, CONNECT, RING,
NO CARRIER, and ERROR. The ATQ command allows the user to turn
result codes on or off.
Q0
Enables modem to send result codes to the computer
(default).
Q1
Disables modem from sending result codes to the computer.
Downloaded
C-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
AT Commands
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
T
Select tone dialing
This command instructs the modem to send DTMF tones while dialing.
Dialed digits are tone dialed until a P command or dial modifier is received.
This is the default setting.
Vn
DCE response format
This command controls whether result codes (including call progress and
negotiation progress messages) are displayed as words or their numeric
equivalents.
V0
Displays result codes as digits.
V1
Displays result codes as text (default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
Xn
Result code selection, call progress monitoring
This command selects which result codes will be used by the modem.
Command
Dial tone
detect
Busy
signal
detect
Supported Result Code
X0
Disable
Disable
OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER,
ERROR
X1
Disable
Disable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,
CONNECT <RATE>
X2
Enable
Disable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,
NODIALTONE, CONNECT <RATE>
X3
Disable
Enable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, BUSY,
CONNECT <RATE>, BLACKLISTED
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
C-5
AT Commands
X4 (default)
Enable
Enable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>,
DELAYED, BLACKLISTED, REORDER,
WARBLE, CALL WAITING DETECTED
X5
Enable
Enable
OK, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR,
NODIALTONE, BUSY, CONNECT <RATE>,
RRING, NO BONGTONE, DELAYED,
BLACKLISTED, REORDER, WARBLE, CALL
WAITING DETECTED
Dial tone detect
Disabled: The modem dials a call regardless of whether it detects a dial
tone.
Enabled: The modem dials only upon detection of a dial tone, and
disconnects the call if the dial tone is not detected within 10
seconds.
Busy tone detect
Disabled: The modem ignores any busy tones it receives.
Enabled: The modem monitors for busy tones.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3,4,5
ERROR Otherwise
Zn
Recall stored profile
The modem performs a soft reset and restores (recalls) the configuration
profile according to the parameter supplied. If no parameter is specified,
zero is assumed. Either Z0 or Z1 restores the profile.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
&Cn Data Carrier Detect (DCD) control
Data Carrier Detect is a signal from the modem to the computer indicating
that a carrier signal is being received from a remote modem. DCD normally
turns off when the modem no longer detects the carrier signal.
&C0 The state of the carrier from the remote modem is ignored.
DCD circuit is always on.
&C1 DCD turns on when the remote modem’s carrier signal is
detected, and off when the carrier signal is not detected
(default).
Downloaded
C-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
AT Commands
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
&Dn DTR control
This command interprets how the modem responds to the state of the DTR
signal and changes to the DTR signal.
&D0 Ignore. The modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats
it as always on. This should only be used if your
communication software does not provide DTR to the
modem
&D1 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,
the modem enters command mode, issues an OK result
code, and remains connected.
&D2 If the DTR signal is not detected while in on-line data mode,
the modem disconnects (default).
&D3 Reset on the on-to-off DTR transition.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3
ERROR Otherwise
&F
Load factory settings
This command loads the configuration stored and programmed at the
factory. This operation replaces all of the command options and the Sregister settings in the active configuration with factory values.
&F
Recall factory setting as active configuration.
&Gn V.22bis guard tone control
This command determines which guard tone, if any, to transmit while
transmitting in the high band (answer mode). This command is only used in
V.22 and V.22bis mode. This option is not used in North America and is for
international use only.
&G0 Guard tone disabled (default).
&G1 Sets guard tone to 550 Hz.
&G2 Sets guard tone to 1800 Hz.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2
ERROR Otherwise
&Kn Local flow control selection
&K0
&K3
&K4
Disable flow control.
Enable CTS/RTS flow control (default).
Enable XON/XOFF flow control.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
C-7
AT Commands
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,3,4
ERROR Otherwise
&Pn Select Pulse Dial Make/Break Ratio (WW)
&P0
&P1
&P2
Selects 39% - 61% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per
second.
Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per
second.
Selects 33% - 67% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per
second.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2
ERROR Otherwise
&Tn Self-test commands
These tests can help to isolate problems if you experience periodic data
loss or random errors.
&T0 Abort. Stops any test in progress.
&T1 Local analog loop. This test verifies modem operation, as
well as the connection between the modem and computer.
Any data entered at the local DTE is modulated, then
demodulated, and returned to the local DTE. To work
properly, the modem must be off-line.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0
CONNECT n=1
ERROR
Otherwise
&V
Display Current Configuration
This command displays the current configuration of the modem. If
nonvolatile memory is supported the stored profiles are displayed as well.
&V
&W
View profiles.
Store current configuration
Saves the current (active) configuration (profile), including S-Registers.
The current configuration comprises a list of storable parameters illustrated
in the &V command. These settings are restored to the active configuration
upon receiving a Zn command or at power up. Refer to the &V command.
&W Stores the current configuration.
Downloaded
C-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
AT Commands
&Zn=x Store telephone number
This command is used to store up to four dialing strings in the modem’s
nonvolatile memory for later dialing. The format for the command is
&Zn=“stored number” where n is the location 0-3 to which the number
should be written. The dial string may contain up to 34 characters. The
ATDS=n command dials using the string stored in location n.
Result Codes:
OK
n=0, 1, 2, 3
ERROR Otherwise
\Nn
Error control mode selection
This command determines the type of error control used by the modem
when sending or receiving data.
\N0
Buffer mode. No error control.
\N1
Direct mode.
\N2
MNP or disconnect mode. The modem attempts to connect
using MNP2-4 error control procedures. If this fails, the
modem disconnects.
This is also known as MNP reliable mode.
\N3
V.42, MNP, or buffered (default).
The modem attempts to connect in V.42 error control mode.
If this fails, it attempts to connect in MNP mode. If this fails, it
connects in buffer mode and continues operation. This is
also known as V.42/MNP auto reliable mode (same as &Q5).
\N4
V.42 or disconnect. The modem attempts to connect in V.42
error control mode. If this fails, the modem disconnects.
\N5
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).
\N7
V.42. MNP or buffered (same as \N3).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,2,3,4,5,7
ERROR Otherwise
\Qn
Local flow control selection
\Q0
Disable flow control.
\Q1
XON/XOFF software flow control.
\Q3
CTS/RTS to DTE (default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1,3
ERROR Otherwise
\Vn
Protocol result code
\V0
Disable protocol result code appended to DCE speed.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
C-9
AT Commands
\V1
Enable protocol result code appended to DCE speed
(default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,1
ERROR Otherwise
%B
View numbers in blacklist
If blacklisting is in effect, this command displays the numbers for which the
last call attempted in the past two hours failed. The ERROR result code
appears in regions that do not require blacklisting.
%Cn
Data compression control
This command determines the operation of V.42bis and MNP class 5 data
compression. On-line changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs
first.
%C0 V.42bis/MNP 5 disabled. No data compression.
%C3 V.42bis/MNP 5 enabled. Data compression enabled
(default).
Result Codes:
OK
n=0,3
ERROR Otherwise
Downloaded
C-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix D
S-registers
S-registers contain the settings that determine how a number of functions
of the internal modem operate. For example, how many times to let the
telephone ring before the modem answers and how long to wait before it
hangs up if a connection fails. You can also customize certain AT
commands such as the escape sequence and command line termination.
The contents of the registers are changed automatically when you modify
corresponding settings in your communication software. If you choose,
however, you can display and edit the contents of the registers manually
when the modem is in command mode. If the value is out of the acceptable
range, then an error is generated.
This chapter describes the settings for each S-register.
S-register values
The format for displaying the value of an S-register is:
ATSn?
where n is the register number. After you type in the register press Enter.
The format for modifying the value of an S-register is:
ATSn=r
where n is the register number, and r is the new register value. After you
type in the register and its new value press Enter.
Some registers vary from one country/region to another.
S0
Auto answer ring number
This register determines the number of rings the modem will count
before automatically answering a call. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not
want the modem to automatically answer at all. When disabled,
the modem can only answer with an ATA command.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
D-1
S-registers
Range: 0-255
Default: 0
Units:
rings
S1
Ring counter
This register is read only. The value of S1 is incremented with
each ring. If no ring occurs over a six-second interval, this register
is cleared.
Range: 0-225
Default: 0
Units:
rings
S2
AT escape character (user defined)
This register determines the ASCII values used for an escape
sequence. The default is the + character. The escape sequence
allows the modem to exit data mode and enter command mode
when on-line. Values greater than 127 disable the escape
sequence.
Range: 0-255, ASCII decimal
Default: 43
Units:
ASCII
S3
Command line termination character (user defined)
This register determines the ASCII values as the carriage return
character. This character is used to end command lines and result
codes.
Range: 0-127, ASCII decimal
Default: 13 (carriage return)
Units:
ASCII
S4
Response formatting character (user defined)
This register determines the ASCII value used as the line feed
character. The modem uses a line feed character in command
mode when it responds to the computer.
Range: 0-127, ASCII decimal
Default: 10 (line feed)
Units:
ASCII
Downloaded
D-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
S-registers
S5
Command line editing character (user defined)
This register sets the character recognized as a backspace and
pertains to asynchronous only. The modem will not recognize the
backspace character if it is set to a value that is greater than 32
ASCII. This character can be used to edit a command line. When
the echo command is enabled, the modem echoes back to the
local DTE the backspace character, an ASCII space character,
and a second backspace character. This means a total of three
characters are transmitted each time the modem processes the
backspace character.
Range: 0-127, ASCII decimal
Default: 8 (backspace)
Units:
ASCII
S6
Wait before dialing
This register sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem
must wait (pause) after going off-hook before dialing the first digit
of the telephone number. The modem always pauses for a
minimum of two seconds, even if the value of S6 is less that two
seconds. The wait for dial tone call progress feature (W dial
modifier in the dial string) will override the value in register S6.
This operation, however, may be affected by some ATX options
according to country/region restrictions. In some countries/regions,
S6 will set dial tone detect time.
Range: 3-255
Default: 3
Units:
seconds
S7
Connection completion time-out
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must wait
before hanging up because carrier is not detected. The timer is
started when the modem finishes dialing (originate), or goes offhook (answer). In originate mode, the timer is reset upon detection
of an answer tone if allowed by county restriction. The timer also
specifies the wait for silence time for the @ dial modifier in
seconds. S7 is not associated with the W dial modifier.
Range: 1-255
Default: 50
Units:
seconds
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
D-3
S-registers
S8
Comma pause time
This register sets the time, in seconds, that the modem must
pause when it encounters a comma (,) in the dial command string.
In some countries/regions, S8 will set both wait before dialing and
comma pause time.
Range: 0-255
Default: 2
Units:
seconds
S11 DTMF dialing speed
This register determines the dialing speed which is prefixed for
each country/region.
Range: 50-255
Default: 95
Units:
.001 seconds
S12 Escape guard time
This register sets the value (in 20 millisecond increments) for the
required pause after the escape sequence.
Range: 0-255
Default: 50
Units:
.02 seconds
Downloaded
D-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
S-registers
S37 Dial line rate
S37 = 0 (default)
maximum modem speed
S37 = 1
reserved
S37 = 2
1200/75 bps
S37 = 3
300 bps
S37 = 4
reserved
S37 = 5
1200 bps
S37 = 6
2400 bps
S37 = 7
4800 bps
S37 = 8
7200 bps
S37 = 9
9600 bps
S37 = 10
12000 bps
S37 = 11
14400 bps
S37 = 12
16800 bps
S37 = 13
19200 bps
S37 = 14
21600 bps
S37 = 15
24000 bps
S37 = 16
26400 bps
S37 = 17
28800 bps
S37 = 18
31200 bps
S37 = 19
33600 bps
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
D-5
S-registers
AT command set result codes
The following table shows the result codes.
The result code summary
Result Code
Numeric
OK
0
Command executed
CONNECT
1
Modem connected to line
RING
2
A ring signal has been
detected
NO CARRIER
3
Modem lost carrier signal, or
does not detect carrier
signal, or does not detect
answer tone
ERROR
4
Invalid command
CONNECT 1200 EC*1
5
Connection at 1200 bps
NO DIAL TONE
6
No dial tone detected
BUSY
7
Busy signal detected
NO ANSWER
8
No quiet answer
CONNECT 2400 EC*1
10
Connection at 2400 bps
CONNECT 4800 EC*
1
11
Connection at 4800 bps
CONNECT 9600 EC*1
12
Connection at 9600 bps
CONNECT 14400 EC*1
13
Connection at 14400 bps
CONNECT 19200 EC*1
14
Connection at 19200 bps
CONNECT 7200 EC*
24
Connection at 7200 bps
CONNECT 12000 EC*1
25
Connection at 12000 bps
CONNECT 16800 EC*1
86
Connection at 16800 bps
CONNECT 300 EC*1
1
40
Connection at 300 bps
1
55
Connection at 21600 bps
CONNECT 24000 EC*1
56
Connection at 24000 bps
CONNECT 26400 EC*1
57
Connection at 26400 bps
CONNECT 28800 EC*1
58
Connection at 28800 bps
CONNECT 31200 EC*
59
Connection at 31200 bps
CONNECT 21600 EC*
Downloaded
D-6
Description
1
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
S-registers
CONNECT 33600 EC*1
60
Connection at 33600 bps
DELAYED*2
88
Delay is in effect for the
dialed number
BLACKLISTED*2
89
Dialed number is blacklisted
BLACKLIST FULL*2
90
Blacklist is full
*1: EC only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option
is enabled. EC is replaced by one of the following symbols, depending
upon the error control method used:
V.42bis - V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression.
V.42 - V.42 error control only.
MNP 5 - MNP class 4 error control and MNP class 5 data
compression.
MNP 4 - MNP class 4 error control only.
NoEC - No error control protocol.
*2: In some countries/regions, these result codes may not appear.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
D-7
S-registers
Downloaded
D-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix E
V.90
The TOSHIBA internal modem uses V.90 technology. The modem is
capable of downstream speeds of 56kbps (kilobits per second) when
connected to an Internet service provider that supports V.90. As with any
modem, the actual throughput (speed of data transfer) depends on analog
telephone line conditions, which can vary considerably. Therefore, many
users will experience throughput in the range of 28-50kbps under normal
telephone line conditions. Upstream data flows at the V.34 rate.
V.90 rates can be achieved only when one V.90-capable host modem is
connected to another. The TOSHIBA Internal modem will select
automatically V.34 if the remote modem lacks V.90 capability or if a
combination of network and/or phone line conditions prevent V.90
connection.
V.90 mode
Function
Transmission speed
Data V.90
From 56kbps (maximum) to 28kbps
(minimum)
Reception only
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
E-1
V.90
Table E-1 Result codes for a V.90 connection
Downloaded
E-2
No.
Result code
Description
70
CONNECT 32000 EC*
Connection at 32000 bps
72
CONNECT 36000 EC*
Connection at 36000 bps
74
CONNECT 40000 EC*
Connection at 40000 bps
76
CONNECT 44000 EC*
Connection at 44000 bps
78
CONNECT 48000 EC*
Connection at 48000 bps
80
CONNECT 52000 EC*
Connection at 52000 bps
82
CONNECT 56000 EC*
Connection at 56000 bps
100
CONNECT 28000 EC*
Connection at 28000 bps
101
CONNECT 29333 EC*
Connection at 29333 bps
102
CONNECT 30666 EC*
Connection at 30666 bps
103
CONNECT 33333 EC*
Connection at 33333 bps
104
CONNECT 34666 EC*
Connection at 34666 bps
105
CONNECT 37333 EC*
Connection at 37333 bps
106
CONNECT 38666 EC*
Connection at 38666 bps
107
CONNECT 41333 EC*
Connection at 41333 bps
108
CONNECT 42666 EC*
Connection at 42666 bps
109
CONNECT 45333 EC*
Connection at 45333 bps
110
CONNECT 46666 EC*
Connection at 46666 bps
111
CONNECT 49333 EC*
Connection at 49333 bps
112
CONNECT 50666 EC*
Connection at 50666 bps
113
CONNECT 53333 EC*
Connection at 53333 bps
114
CONNECT 54666 EC*
Connection at 54666 bps
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
V.90
* EC stands for the Error Control method, which appears only when the
extended result codes configuration option is enabled. EC is replaced by
one of the following symbols, depending on the error control method
used.
V42bis
V.42 error control and V.42bis data compression
V42
V.42 error control only
NoEC
No error control protocol
AT Command
-V90=*
V.90 Dial Line Rate
-V90 sets the maximum V.90 downstream that the
modem attempts to connect.
-V90=0
V.90 disabled
-V90=1
V.90 enabled: automatic speed selection maximum modem speed (default)
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
E-3
V.90
Downloaded
E-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix F
Wireless LAN
Card Specifications
Form Factor
PCI-Ex MiniCard Type
Compatibility
■ IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANS
■ Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) certified by the Wi-Fi
Alliance. The ‘Wi-Fi CERTIFIED’ logo is a
certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Network Operating
System
■ Microsoft Windows® Networking
Media Access
Protocol
■ CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with
Acknowledgment (ACK)
Data Rate
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 54Mbps (IEEE802.11a/
IEEE802.11g)
■ Theoretical maximum speed: 11Mbps (IEEE802.11b)
Radio Characteristics
Radio Characteristics of Wireless LAN Cards may vary according to:
■ Country/region where the product was purchased
■ Type of product
Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations.
Although Wireless LAN wireless networking products have been designed
for operation in the license-free 2.4GHz and 5GHz band, local radio
regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless
communication equipment.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
F-1
Wireless LAN
Refer to the sheet “Information to the User” for regulatory information that
may apply in your country/region.
R-F Frequency
■ Band 5GHz (5150-5850 MHz) (Revision A)
■ Band 2.4GHz (2400-2483.5 MHz) (Revision
B, G)
Modulation
Technique
■ DSSS-CCK, DSSS-DQPSK, DSSS-DBPSK
(Revision B)
■ OFDM-BPSK, OFDM-QPSK, OFDM-16QAM,
OFDM-64QAM (Revision A, G)
The range of the wireless signal is related to the transmit rate of the
wireless communication. Communications at lower transmit range may
travel larger distances.
■ The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas
are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials.
■ Range is also impacted due to "obstacles" in the signal path of the radio
that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal.
Supported Frequency Sub-bands
Subject to the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions, your
Wireless LAN card may support a different set of 5 GHz/2.4 GHz channels.
Consult your Authorized Wireless LAN or TOSHIBA Sales office for
information about the radio regulations that apply in the countries/regions.
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision B and G)
Downloaded
F-2
Frequency Range
Channel ID
2400-2483.5 MHz
1
2412
2
2417
3
2422
4
2427
5
2432
6
2437
7
2442
8
2447
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Wireless LAN
9
2452
10
2457*1
11
2462
12
2467*2
13
2472*2
*1 Factory-set default channels
*2 Refer to the sheet Approved Countries/Regions for use for the countries/
regions that in which these channels can be used. When installing Wireless
LAN cards, the channel configuration is managed as follows:
■ For wireless clients that operate in a Wireless LAN Infrastructure, the
Wireless LAN card will automatically start operation at the channel
identified by the Wireless LAN Access Point. When roaming between
different access points the station can dynamically switch to another
channel if required.
■ For Wireless LAN cards installed in wireless clients that operating in a
peer-to-peer mode, the card will use the default channel 10.
■ In a Wireless LAN Access Point, the Wireless LAN card will use the
factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN
Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the
Wireless LAN Access Point device.
Wireless IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets (Revision A)
Frequency Range
Channel ID
5150-5850 MHz
36
5180
40
5200
44
5220
48
5240
52
5260
56
5280
60
5300
64
5320
100
5500
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
F-3
Wireless LAN
Downloaded
F-4
104
5520
108
5540
112
5560
116
5580
120
5600
124
5620
128
5640
132
5660
136
5680
140
5700
149
5745
153
5765
157
5785
161
5805
165
5825
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix G
Bluetooth wireless technology
Interoperability
BluetoothTM Cards from TOSHIBA are designed to be interoperable with
any product with Bluetooth wireless technology that is based on Frequency
Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) radio technology, and is compliant to:
■ Bluetooth Specification Ver2.0+EDR, as defined and approved by The
Bluetooth Special Interest Group.
■ Logo certification with Bluetooth wireless technology as defined by The
Bluetooth Special interest Group.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
G-1
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
■ Bluetooth wireless technology is a new innovative technology, and
TOSHIBA has not confirmed compatibility of its BluetoothTM products
with all computers and/or equipment using Bluetooth wireless
technology other than TOSHIBA portable computers.
Always use BluetoothTM Cards from TOSHIBA in order to enable
wireless networks over two or more (up to a total of seven) TOSHIBA
portable computers using these cards. Please contact TOSHIBA PC
product support on Web site
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe
or
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more
information.
■ When you use BluetoothTM Cards from TOSHIBA close to 2.4 GHz
Wireless LAN devices, Bluetooth transmissions might slow down or
cause errors. If you detect certain interference while you use
BluetoothTM Cards from TOSHIBA, always change the frequency, move
your computer to the area outside of the interference range of 2.4 GHz
Wireless LAN devices (40 meters/43.74 yards or more) or stop
transmitting from your computer. Please contact TOSHIBA PC product
support on Web site
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe
or
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more
information.
■ BluetoothTM and Wireless LAN devices operate within the same radio
frequency range and may interfere with one another. If you use
BluetoothTM and Wireless LAN devices simultaneously, you may
occasionally experience a less than optimal network performance or
even lose your network connection.
If you should experience any such problem, immediately turn off either
one of your BluetoothTM or Wireless LAN.
Please contact TOSHIBA PC product support on web site
http://www.toshiba-europe.com/computers/tnt/bluetooth.htm in Europe
or
http://www.pc.support.global.toshiba.com in the United States for more
information.
Downloaded
G-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Bluetooth wireless technology and your Health
The products with Bluetooth wireless technology, like other radio devices,
emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted
by devices with Bluetooth wireless technology however is far much less
than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for
example mobile phones.
Because products with Bluetooth wireless technology operate within the
guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, TOSHIBA believes Bluetooth wireless technology is
safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect
the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of
panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret
the extensive research literature.
In some situations or environments, the use of Bluetooth wireless
technology may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible
representatives of the organization. These situations may for example
include:
■ Using the equipment with Bluetooth wireless technology on board of
airplanes, or
■ In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices
or services is perceived or identified as harmful.
If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices
in a specific organization or environment (e.g. airports), you are
encouraged to ask for authorization to use the device with Bluetooth
wireless technology prior to turning on the equipment.
Regulatory statements
General
This product complies with any mandatory product specification in any
country/region where the product is sold. In addition, the product complies
with the following.
European Union (EU) and EFTA
This equipment complies with the R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC and has
been provided with the CE mark accordingly.
Canada - Industry Canada (IC)
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
G-3
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
L ‘ utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions
suivantes: (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’ utilisateur du
dispositif doit étre prét à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement
du dispositif.
The term “IC” before the equipment certification number only signifies that
the Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
USA-Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.
-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
TOSHIBA is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused
by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this BluetoothTM
Card from TOSHIBA, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables
and equipment other than specified by TOSHIBA.
The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification,
substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user.
Downloaded
G-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the BluetoothTM Card from TOSHIBA is far
below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
BluetoothTM Card from TOSHIBA shall be used in such a manner that the
potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. In
normal operating configuration, the LCD in the upright position, the
distance between the antenna and the user should not be less than 20cm.
In addition, Bluetooth has been tested with Wireless LAN transceiver for
co-location requirements. This device and its antenna(s) must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is
located or pointed such that it does not emit RF field in excess of Health
Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable
from Health Canada's website www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Taiwan
Article 12 Without permission granted by the DGT, any company,
enterprise, or user is not allowed to change frequency, enhance
transmitting power or alter original characteristic as well as
performance to a approved low power radio-frequency devices.
Article 14 The low power radio-frequency devices shall not influence
aircraft security and interfere legal communications; If found, the
user shall cease operating immediately until no interference is
achieved.
The said legal communications means radio communications is
operated in compliance with the Telecommunications Act.
The low power radio-frequency devices must be susceptible with
the interference from legal communications or ISM radio wave
radiated devices.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
G-5
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Using BluetoothTM Card from TOSHIBA equipment in
Japan
In Japan, the frequency bandwidth of 2,400 - 2,483.5 MHz for second
generation low-power data communication systems such as this equipment
overlaps that of mobile object identification systems (premises radio station
and specified low-power radio station).
1. Sticker
Please put the following sticker on computer incorporating this product.
The frequency bandwidth of this equipment may operate
within the same range as industrial devices, scientific
devices, medical devices, microwave ovens, licensed radio
stations and non-licensed specified low-power radio stations
for mobile object identification systems (RFID) used in
factory production lines (Other Radio Stations).
1. Before using this equipment, ensure that it does not
interfere with any of the equipment listed above.
2. If this equipment causes RF interference to other radio
stations, promptly change the frequency being used,
change the location of use, or turn off the source of
emissions.
3. Contact TOSHIBA Direct PC if you have problems with
interference caused by this product to Other Radio Stations.
2. Indication
The indication shown below appears on this equipment.
(1) 2.4 : This equipment uses a frequency of 2.4 GHz.
(2) FH : This equipment uses FH-SS modulation.
(3) 1: The interference range of this equipment is less than 10 m.
(4)
Downloaded
G-6
This equipment uses a frequency bandwidth from
2,400 MHz to 2,483.5 MHz.
It is impossible to avoid the band of mobile object
identification systems.
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
3. TOSHIBA Direct PC
Monday - Friday:
Toll Free Tel
:
Direct Dial
:
FAX
:
10:00-17:00
0120-15-1048
03-3457-4850
03-3457-4868
Device Authorization
This device obtains the Technical Conditions Compliance Approval, and it
belongs to the device class of radio equipment of low-power data
communication system radio station stipulated in the Telecommunications
Business Law.
The Name of the radio equipment: EYXF3CS
JAPAN APPROVALS INSTITUTE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Approval Number: D05-0074001
The following restrictions apply:
Do not disassemble or modify the device.
Do not install the embedded wireless module into other device.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
G-7
Bluetooth wireless technology Interoperability
Downloaded
G-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix H
AC Power Cord and Connectors
The power cord’s AC input plug must be compatible with the various
international AC power outlets and the cord must meet the standards for
the country/region in which it is used. All cords must meet the following
specifications:
Length:
Minimum 2 meters
Wire size:
Minimum 0.75 mm2
Current rating:
Minimum 2.5 amperes
Voltage rating:
125 or 250 VAC
(depending on country/region’s power standards)
Certification agencies
U.S. and Canada: UL listed and CSA certified
No. 18 AWG, Type SVT or SPT-2
Australia:
AS
Japan:
DENANHO
Europe:
Austria:
OVE
Italy:
IMQ
Belgium:
CEBEC
The Netherlands:
KEMA
Denmark:
DEMKO
Norway:
NEMKO
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
H-1
AC Power Cord and Connectors
Finland:
FIMKO
Sweden:
SEMKO
France:
LCIE
Switzerland:
SEV
Germany:
VDE
United Kingdom:
BSI
In Europe, two conductors power cord must be VDE type, H05VVH2-F or
H03VVH2-F and for three conductors power cord must be VDE type,
H05VV-F.
For the United States and Canada, two pin plug configuration must be a 215P (250V) or 1-15P (125V) and three pin plug configuration must be 615P (250V) or 5-15P (125V) as designated in the U.S. National Electrical
code handbook and the Canadian Electrical Code Part II.
The following illustrations show the plug shapes for the U.S.A. and Canada,
the United Kingdom, Australia and Europe.
USA
UL approved
Australia
AS approved
Canada
United Kingdom
BS approved
Europe
Approved by the
appropriate agency
CSA approved
Downloaded
H-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Appendix I
TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection
Timer
This function sets the limit for the number of days during which you are able
to bypass authentication for the BIOS, Hard Disk Drive and Fingerprint.
When the time limit is exceeded, you are required to provide the Password
or fingerprint authentication for the BIOS and Hard Disk Drive to gain
access to the system.
To set permission and limits for the TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer
please use the TOSHIBA Password Utility.
The settings can only be activated or modified by a user with supervisor
authority. If the supervisor password is not set, click on the Set button in
Supervisor Password from the supervisor tab in TOSHIBA Password
Utility and set the password on the dialog screen that appears.
Then, click on the Set button in TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer.
Take the following action if the set limit is exceeded.
■ If the Supervisor Password is registered but the User Password is not,
enter the Supervisor Password to boot up the computer.
■ If both the Supervisor Password and the User Password are registered,
enter either the Supervisor Password, the User Password or the
fingerprint authentication to boot up the computer.
■ The limit counts the number of days from the last time Windows is
logged on till the next time the computer is booted up. The range can
be set from 1 to 28 days.
■ Authentication is required if the computer’s clock is significantly
modified.
■ If the Supervisor Password is deleted, this function becomes disabled.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
I-1
TOSHIBA Anti-theft Protection Timer
Downloaded
I-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary
The terms in this glossary cover topics related to this manual.
Alternate naming is included for reference.
Abbreviations
AC: alternating current
AGP: accelerated graphics port
ANSI: American National Standards Institute
APM: advanced power manager
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange
BIOS: basic input output system
CD-ROM: Compact Disc-Read Only Memory
CD-RW: Compact Disc-ReWritable
CMOS: complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
CPU: central processing unit
CRT: cathode ray tube
DC: direct current
DDC: display data channel
DMA: direct memory access
DOS: disk operating system
DVD: digital versatile disc
DVD-R: Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable
DVD-RAM: Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory
DVD-ROM: Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory
DVD-RW: Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable
ECP: extended capabilities port
FDD: floppy disk drive
FIR: fast infrared
HDD: hard disk drive
IDE: integrated drive electronics
I/O: input/output
IrDA: Infrared Data Association
IRQ: interrupt request
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary-1
Glossary
KB: kilobyte
LCD: liquid crystal display
LED: light emitting diode
LSI: large scale integration
MB: megabyte
MS-DOS: Microsoft Disk Operating System
OCR: optical character recognition (reader)
PCB: printed circuit board
PCI: peripheral component interconnect
RAM: random access memory
RGB: red, green, and blue
ROM: read only memory
RTC: real time clock
SCSI: small computer system interface
SIO: serial input/output
SXGA+: super extended graphics array plus
TFT: thin-film transistor
UART: universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
USB: Universal Serial Bus
UXGA: ultra extended graphics array
VESA: Video Electronic Standards Association
VGA: video graphics array
VRT: voltage reduction technology
WXGA: wide extended graphics array
XGA: extended graphics array
A
AccuPoint: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer
keyboard.
adaptor: A device that provides an interface between two dissimilar
electronic devices. For example, the AC adaptor modifies the power
from a wall outlet for use by the computer. This term also refers to
the add-in circuit cards that control external devices, such as video
monitors and magnetic tape devices.
allocate: To assign a space or function for a specific task.
alphanumeric: Keyboard characters including letters, numbers and other
symbols, such as punctuation marks or mathematical symbols.
alternating current (AC): Electric current that reverses its direction of flow
at regular intervals.
Downloaded
Glossary-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary
analog signal: A signal whose characteristics such as amplitude and
frequency vary in proportion to (are an analog of) the value to be
transmitted. Voice communications are analog signals.
ANSI: American National Standards Institute. An organization established
to adopt and define standards for a variety of technical disciplines.
For example, ANSI defined the ASCII standard and other
information processing requirements.
antistatic: A material used to prevent the buildup of static electricity.
application: A group of programs that together are used for a specific task
such as accounting, financial planning, spreadsheets, word
processing and games.
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII code
is a set of 256 binary codes that represent the most commonly used
letters, numbers, and symbols.
async: Short for asynchronous.
asynchronous: Lacking regular time relationship. As applied to computer
communications, asynchronous refers to the method of transmitting
data that does not require a steady stream of bits to be transmitted
at regular time intervals.
B
backup: A duplicate copy of files kept as a spare in case the original is
destroyed.
batch file: A file that can be executed from the system prompt containing
a sequence of operating system commands or executable files.
binary: The base two number system composed of zeros and ones (off or
on), used by most digital computers. The right-most digit of a binary
number has a value of 1, the next a value of 2, then 4, 8, 16, and so
on. For example, the binary number 101 has a value of 5. See also
ASCII.
BIOS: Basic Input Output System. The firmware that controls data flow
within the computer. See also firmware.
bit: Derived from "binary digit," the basic unit of information used by the
computer. It is either zero or one. Eight bits is one byte. See also
byte.
board: A circuit board. An internal card containing electronic components,
called chips, which perform a specific function or increase the
capabilities of the system.
boot: Short for bootstrap. A program that starts or restarts the computer.
The program reads instructions from a storage device into the
computer’s memory.
bps: Bits per second. Typically used to describe the data transmission
speed of a modem.
buffer: The portion of the computer’s memory where data is temporarily
stored. Buffers often compensate for differences in the rate of flow
from one device to another.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary-3
Glossary
bus: An interface for transmission of signals, data or electric power.
byte: The representation of a single character. A sequence of eight bits
treated as a single unit; also the smallest addressable unit within the
system.
C
cache memory: High speed memory which stores data that increases
processor speed and data transfer rate. When the CPU reads data
from main memory, it stores a copy of this data in cache memory.
The next time the CPU needs that same data, it looks for it in the
cache memory rather than the main memory, which saves time. The
computer has two cache levels. Level one is incorporated into the
processor and level two resides in external memory.
capacity: The amount of data that can be stored on a magnetic storage
device such as a floppy disk or hard disk. It is usually described in
terms of kilobytes (KB), where one KB = 1024 bytes and megabytes
(MB), where one MB = 1024 KB.
card: Synonym for board. See board.
CardBus: An industry standard bus for 32-bit PC cards.
CD-ROM: A Compact Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity disc that
can be read from but not written to. The CD-ROM drive uses a laser,
rather than magnetic heads, to read data from the disc.
CD-R: A Compact Disc-Recordable disc can be written once and read
many times. See also CD-ROM.
CD-RW: A Compact Disc-ReWritable disc can be rewritten many times.
See also CD-ROM.
character: Any letter, number, punctuation mark, or symbol used by the
computer. Also synonymous with byte.
chassis: The frame containing the computer.
chip: A small semiconductor containing computer logic and circuitry for
processing, memory, input/output functions and controlling other
chips.
CMOS: Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. An electronic circuit
fabricated on a silicon wafer that requires very little power.
Integrated circuits implemented in CMOS technology can be tightly
packaged and are highly reliable.
cold start: Starting a computer that is currently off (turning on the power).
COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4: The names assigned to the serial and
communication ports.
commands: Instructions you enter at the terminal keyboard that direct the
actions of the computer or its peripheral devices.
communications: The means by which a computer transmits and
receives data to and from another computer or device. See parallel
interface; serial interface.
Downloaded
Glossary-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary
compatibility: 1) The ability of one computer to accept and process data
in the same manner as another computer without modifying the data
or the media upon which it is being transferred.
2) the ability of one device to connect to or communicate with
another system or component.
components: Elements or parts (of a system) which make up the whole
(system).
computer program: A set of instructions written for a computer that
enable it to achieve a desired result.
computer system: A combination of hardware, software, firmware, and
peripheral components assembled to process data into useful
information.
configuration: The specific components in your system (such as the
terminal, printer, and disk drives) and the settings that define how
your system works. You use the HW Setup program to control your
system configuration.
control keys: A key or sequence of keys you enter from the keyboard to
initiate a particular function within a program.
controller: Built-in hardware and software that controls the functions of a
specific internal or peripheral device (e.g. keyboard controller).
co-processor: A circuit built into the processor that is dedicated to
intensive math calculations.
CPS: Characters Per Second. Typically used to indicate the transmission
speed of a printer.
CPU: Central Processing Unit. The portion of the computer that interprets
and executes instructions.
CRT: Cathode Ray Tube. A vacuum tube in which beams projected on a
fluorescent screen-producing luminous spots. An example is the
television set.
cursor: A small, blinking rectangle or line that indicates the current
position on the display screen.
D
data: Information that is factual, measurable or statistical that a computer
can process, store, or retrieve.
data bits: A data communications parameter controlling the number of bits
(binary digits) used to make up a byte. If data bits = 7 the computer
can generate 128 unique characters. If data bits = 8 the computer
can generate 256 unique characters.
DC: Direct Current. Electric current that flows in one direction. This type of
power is usually supplied by batteries.
default: The parameter value automatically selected by the system when
you or the program do not provide instructions. Also called a preset
value.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary-5
Glossary
delete: To remove data from a disk or other data storage device.
Synonymous with erase.
device driver: A program that controls communication between a specific
peripheral device and the computer. The CONFIG.SYS file contains
device drivers that MS-DOS loads when you turn the computer on.
dialog box: A window that accepts user input to make system settings or
record other information.
disk drive: The device that randomly accesses information on a disk and
copies it to the computer’s memory. It also writes data from memory
to the disk. To accomplish these tasks, the unit physically rotates
the disk at high speed past a read-write head.
disk storage: Storing data on magnetic disk. Data is arranged on
concentric tracks much like a phonograph record.
display: A CRT, LCD, or other image producing device used to view
computer output.
documentation: The set of manuals and/or other instructions written for
the users of a computer system or application. Computer system
documentation typically includes procedural and tutorial information
as well as system functions.
DOS: Disk Operating System. See operating system.
driver: A software program, generally part of the operating system, that
controls a specific piece of hardware (frequently a peripheral device
such as a printer or mouse).
Dual Pointing Device: Pointing device consisting of AccuPoint and Touch
Pad. Both of these device can function together or separately. See
AccuPoint and Touch Pad.
DVD-R (+R, -R): A Digital Versatile Disc-Recordable disk can be written
once and read many times. The DVD-R drive uses a laser to read
data from the disc.
DVD-RAM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Random Access Memory is a highcapacity, high performance disc that lets you store large volumes of
data. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data from the disc.
DVD-ROM: A Digital Versatile Disc-Read Only Memory is a high capacity,
high performance disc suitable for play back of video and other
high-density files. The DVD-ROM drive uses a laser to read data
from the disc.
DVD-RW (+RW, -RW): A Digital Versatile Disc-ReWritable disc can be
rewritten many times.
E
echo: To send back a reflection of the transmitted data to the sending
device. You can display the information on the screen, or output it to
the printer, or both. When a computer receives back data it
transmitted to a CRT (or other peripheral device) and then
retransmits the data to printer, the printer is said to echo the CRT.
erase: See delete.
Downloaded
Glossary-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary
escape: 1) A code (ASCII code 27), signaling the computer that what
follows are commands; used with peripheral devices such as
printers and modems.
2) A means of aborting the task currently in progress.
escape guard time: A time before and after an escape code is sent to the
modem which distinguishes between escapes that are part of the
transmitted data, and escapes that are intended as a command to
the modem.
execute: To interpret and execute an instruction.
Extended Capability Port: An industry standard that provides a data
buffer, switchable forward and reverse data transmission, and run
length encoding (RLE) support.
F
fast infrared: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial
data transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.
file: A collection of related information; a file can contain data, programs,
or both.
fingerprint sensor: The fingerprint sensor compares and analyzes the
unique characteristics in a fingerprint.
firmware: A set of instructions built into the hardware which controls and
directs a microprocessor’s activities.
floppy disk: A removable disk that stores magnetically encoded data.
floppy disk drive (FDD): An electromechanical device that reads and
writes to floppy disks.
Fn-esse: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you assign functions to hot keys.
folder: An icon in Windows used to store documents or other folders.
format: The process of readying a blank disk for its first use. Formatting
establishes the structure of the disk that the operating system
expects before it writes files or programs onto the disk.
function keys: The keys labeled F1 through F12 that tell the computer to
perform certain functions.
G
gigabyte (GB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 megabytes. See also
megabyte.
graphics: Drawings, pictures, or other images, such as charts or graphs,
to present information.
H
hard disk: A non-removable disk usually referred to as drive C. The
factory installs this disk and only a trained engineer can remove it
for servicing. Also called fixed disk.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary-7
Glossary
hard disk drive (HDD): An electromechanical device that reads and writes
a hard disk. See also hard disk.
hardware: The physical electronic and mechanical components of a
computer system: typically, the computer itself, external disk drives,
etc. See also software and firmware.
hertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals one cycle per second.
hexadecimal: The base 16 numbering system composed of the digits 0
through 9 and the letters A, B, C, D, E, and F.
host computer: The computer that controls, regulates, and transmits
information to a device or another computer.
hot key: The computer’s feature in which certain keys in combination with
the extended function key, Fn, can be used to set system
parameters, such as speaker volume.
HW Setup: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters for various
hardware components.
I
icon: A small graphic image displayed on the screen or in the indicator
panel. In Windows, an icon represents an object that the user can
manipulate.
i.LINK (IEEE1394): This port enables high-speed data transfer directly
from external devices such as digital video cameras.
infrared port: A cableless communications port capable of using infrared
signals to send serial data.
input: The data or instructions you provide to a computer, communication
device or other peripheral device from the keyboard or external or
internal storage devices. The data sent (or output) by the sending
computer is input for the receiving computer.
instruction: Statements or commands that specify how to perform a
particular task.
interface: 1) Hardware and/or software components of a system used
specifically to connect one system or device to another.
2) To physically connect one system or device to another to
exchange information.
3) The point of contact between user, the computer, and the
program, for example, the keyboard or a menu.
interrupt request: A signal that gives a component access to the
processor.
I/O: Input/output. Refers to acceptance and transfer of data to and from a
computer.
I/O devices: Equipment used to communicate with the computer and
transfer data to and from it.
IrDA 1.1: An industry standard that enables cableless infrared serial data
transfer at speeds of up to 4 Mbps.
Downloaded
Glossary-8
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary
J
jumper: A small clip or wire that allows you to change the hardware
characteristics by electrically connecting two points of a circuit.
K
K: Taken from the Greek word kilo, meaning 1000; often used as
equivalent to 1024, or 2 raised to the 10th power. See also byte and
kilobyte.
KB: See kilobyte.
keyboard: An input device containing switches that are activated by
manually pressing marked keys. Each keystroke activates a switch
that transmits a specific code to the computer. For each key, the
transmitted code is, in turn, representative of the (ASCII) character
marked on the key.
kilobyte (KB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 bytes. See also byte
and megabyte.
L
level 2 cache: See cache.
Light Emitting Diode (LED): A semiconductor device that emits light
when a current is applied.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD): Liquid crystal sealed between two sheets
of glass coated with transparent conducting material. The viewingside coating is etched into character forming segments with leads
that extend to the edge of the glass. Applying a voltage between the
glass sheets alters the brightness of the liquid crystal.
LSI: Large Scale Integration.
1) A technology that allows the inclusion of up to 100,000 simple
logic gates on a single chip.
2) An integrated circuit that uses large scale integration.
M
main board: See motherboard.
megabyte (MB): A unit of data storage equal to 1024 kilobytes. See also
kilobyte.
megahertz: A unit of wave frequency that equals 1 million cycles per
second. See also hertz.
menu: A software interface that displays a list of options on the screen.
Also called a screen.
microprocessor: A hardware component contained in a single integrated
circuit that carries out instructions. Also called the central
processing unit (CPU), one of the main parts of the computer.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary-9
Glossary
mode: A method of operation, for example, the boot mode, Standby Mode
or the Hibernation Mode.
modem: Derived from modulator/demodulator, a device that converts
(modulates) digital data for transmission over telephone lines and
then converts modulated data (demodulates) to digital format where
received.
monitor: A device that uses rows and columns of pixels to display
alphanumeric characters or graphic images. See also CRT.
motherboard: A name sometimes used to refer to the main printed circuit
board in processing equipment. It usually contains integrated
circuits that perform the processor’s basic functions and provides
connectors for adding other boards that perform special functions.
Sometimes called a main board.
MP3: An audio compression standard that enables high-quality
transmission and real-time playback of sound files.
N
non-system disk: A formatted floppy disk you can use to store programs
and data but you cannot use to start the computer. See system disk.
nonvolatile memory: Memory, usually read-only (ROM), that is capable
of permanently storing information. Turning the computer’s power
off does not alter data stored in nonvolatile memory.
numeric keypad overlay: A feature that allows you to use certain keys on
the keyboard to perform numeric entry, or to control cursor and
page movement.
O
OCR: Optical Character Recognition (reader). A technique or device that
uses laser or visible light to identify characters and input them into a
storage device.
online state: A functional state of a peripheral device when it is ready to
receive or transmit data.
operating system: A group of programs that controls the basic operation
of a computer. Operating system functions include interpreting
programs, creating data files, and controlling the transmission and
receipt (input/output) of data to and from memory and peripheral
devices.
output: The results of a computer operation. Output commonly indicates
data.
1) printed on paper, 2) displayed at a terminal, 3) sent through the
serial port of internal modem, or 4) stored on some magnetic media.
Downloaded
Glossary-10
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary
P
parallel interface: Refers to a type of information exchange that transmits
information one byte (8 bits) at a time. See also serial interface.
parity: 1) The symmetrical relationship between two parameter values
(integers) both of which are either on or off; odd or even; 0 or 1.
2) In serial communications, an error detection bit that is added to a
group of data bits making the sum of the bits even or odd. Parity can
be set to none, odd, or even.
password: A unique string of characters used to identify a specific user.
The computer provides various levels of password protection such
as user, supervisor and eject.
pel: The smallest area of the display that can be addressed by software.
Equal in size to a pixel or group of pixels. See pixel.
peripheral component interconnect: An industry standard 32-bit bus.
peripheral device: An I/O device that is external to the central processor
and/or main memory such as a printer or a mouse.
pixel: A picture element. The smallest dot that can be made on a display
or printer. Also called a pel.
plug and play: A capability with Windows that enables the system to
automatically recognize connections of external devices and make
the necessary configurations in the computer.
port: The electrical connection through which the computer sends and
receives data to and from devices or other computers.
Power Saver Utility: A TOSHIBA utility that lets you set the parameters
for various power-saving functions.
printed circuit board (PCB): A hardware component of a processor to
which integrated circuits and other components are attached. The
board itself is typically flat and rectangular, and constructed of
fiberglass, to form the attachment surface.
program: A set of instructions a computer can execute that enables it to
achieve a desired result. See also application.
prompt: A message the computer provides indicating it is ready for or
requires information or an action from you.
R
Radio frequency interference (RFI) shield: A metal shield enclosing the
printed circuit boards of the printer or computer to prevent radio and
TV interference. All computer equipment generates radio frequency
signals. The FCC regulates the amount of signals a computing
device can allow past its shielding. A Class A device is sufficient for
office use. Class B provides a more stringent classification for home
equipment use. TOSHIBA portable computers comply with Class B
computing device regulations.
Random Access Memory (RAM): High speed memory within the
computer circuitry that can be read or written to.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary-11
Glossary
restart: Resetting a computer without turning it off (also called “warm boot”
or “soft reset”). See also boot.
RGB: Red, green, and blue. A device that uses three input signals, each
activating an electron gun for a primary additive color (red, green,
and blue) or port for using such a device. See also CRT.
RJ11: A modular telephone jack.
RJ45: A modular LAN jack.
ROM: Read Only Memory: A nonvolatile memory chip manufactured to
contain information that controls the computer’s basic operation.
You cannot access or change information stored in ROM.
S
SCSI: Small Computer System Interface is an industry standard interface
for connection of a variety of peripheral devices.
SD card: Secure Digital cards are flash memory widely used in a variety of
digital devices such as digital cameras and Personal Digital
Assistants.
serial communications: A communications technique that uses as few as
two interconnecting wires to send bits one after another.
serial interface: Refers to a type of information exchange that transmits
information sequentially, one bit at a time. Contrast: Parallel
interface.
SIO: Serial Input/Output. The electronic methodology used in serial data
transmission.
soft key: Key combinations that emulate keys on the IBM keyboard,
change some configuration options, stop program execution, and
access the numeric keypad overlay.
software: The set of programs, procedures and related documentation
associated with a computer system. Specifically refers to computer
programs that direct and control the computer system’s activities.
See also hardware.
stop bit: One or more bits of a byte that follow the transmitted character or
group codes in asynchronous serial communications.
subpixel: Three elements, one red, one green and blue (RGB), that make
up a pixel on the color LCD. The computer sets subpixels
independently, each may emit a different degree of brightness. See
also pixel.
synchronous: Having a constant time interval between successive bits,
characters or events.
system disk: A disk that has been formatted with an operating system.
For MS-DOS the operating system is contained in two hidden files
and the COMMAND.COM file. You can boot a computer using a
system disk. Also called an operating system disk.
Downloaded
Glossary-12
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary
T
terminal: A typewriter-like keyboard and CRT display screen connected to
the computer for data input/output.
TFT display: A liquid crystal display (LCD) made from an array of liquid
crystal cells using active-matrix technology with thin film transistor
(TFT) to drive each cell.
Touch Pad: A pointing device integrated into the TOSHIBA computer
palm rest.
TTL: Transistor-transistor logic. A logic circuit design that uses switching
transistors for gates and storage.
U
Universal Serial Bus: This serial interface lets you communicate with
several devices connected in a chain to a single port on the
computer.
V
VGA: Video Graphics Array is an industry standard video adaptor that lets
you run any popular software.
volatile memory: Random access memory (RAM) that stores information
as long as power is supplied to the computer.
W
warm start: Restarting or resetting a computer without turning it off.
window: A portion of the screen that can display its own application,
document or dialog box. Often used to mean a Microsoft Windows
window.
Wireless LAN: Local Area Network (LAN) through wireless
communication.
write protection: A method for protecting a floppy disk from accidental
erasure.
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Glossary-13
Glossary
Downloaded
Glossary-14
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Index
Index
A
AC adaptor, 1-4
additional, 1-17, 8-10
connecting, 3-2
Advanced Port Replicator III
Plus, 1-17, 8-15
ASCII characters, 5-9
B
Battery
charging, 6-6
extending life, 6-10
indicator, 2-12, 6-2
location, 2-7
monitoring capacity, 6-8
real time clock, 1-4, 6-5
save mode, 1-12
types, 6-3
Battery charger, 1-17, 8-10
Battery pack, 1-4, 2-7
additional, 8-9
replacing, 6-10
Bluetooth, 1-9, 4-31
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba,
1-14
problems, 9-20
Boot Priority, 7-3
C
CD-ROM, 2-4
CD-ROM drive, 1-5, 9-9
Cleaning the computer, 4-35
Cooling vents, 2-3
D
DC IN indicator, 2-12, 6-3
Display, 1-6
automatic power off, 1-11
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
brightness decrease, 5-5
brightness increase, 5-5
controller, B-1
hinge, 2-10
opening, 3-4
screen, 2-10
DLA for TOSHIBA, 1-16, 4-22
Docking interface, 1-8, 2-7
Documentation list, 1-2
Dual Pointing Device, 1-7
AccuPoint, 1-7, 2-10, 4-2
AccuPoint control buttons,
2-10, 4-1
Problems, 9-14
Touch Pad, 1-7, 2-10, 4-1
Touch Pad control buttons,
2-10, 4-1
Touch Pad location, 2-9
using, 4-1
DVD, 9-10
DVD Super Multi drive, 1-6
location, 2-4
problems, 9-12
using, 4-11
writing, 4-16
DVD-ROM, 2-4
DVD-ROM drive, 1-5, 9-10
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW drive,
1-5, 1-6
location, 2-4
problems, 9-10, 9-11
using, 4-11
writing, 4-14
E
Equipment checklist, 1-1
External monitor, 1-7, 2-5, 8-10
problems, 9-18
Index-1
Index
F
Fingerprint Sensor
location, 2-9, 4-1
problems, 9-16
using, 4-3
Floppy disk care, 4-25
Fn + Ctrl (enhanced keyboard
simulation), 5-3
Fn + Enter, 5-3
Fn + Esc (sound mute), 5-3
Fn + F1 (instant security), 5-4
Fn + F10 (Arrow mode), 5-3
Fn + F11 (Numeric mode), 5-3
Fn + F12 (ScrLock), 5-3
Fn + F2 (power save mode), 5-4
Fn + F3 (standby), 5-4
Fn + F4 (hibernation), 5-4
Fn + F5 (display selection), 5-5
Fn + F6 (internal LCD screen
brightness decreases), 5-5
Fn + F7 (internal LCD screen
brightness increases), 5-5
Fn + F8 (wireless setting), 5-5
Fn + F9 (Dual Pointing Device),
5-6
Fn + space (LCD screen resolution selection), 5-6
Fn + Tab (Optical media drive
power icon), 5-6
Fn-esse, 1-14
Function keys, 5-2
G
Graphics controller, 1-7
H
Hard disk drive, 1-4
automatic power off, 1-11
HDD indicator, 2-12
HDD Protection, 1-12
Heat dispersal, 1-12, 4-40
Hibernation, 1-13, 5-4
Hot keys, 1-11
Downloaded
Index-2
from LpManual.com Manuals
display selection, 5-5
instant security, 5-4
Internal LCD screen brightness decrease, 5-5
Internal LCD screen brightness increase, 5-5
power save mode, 5-4
sound mute, 5-3
standby, 5-4
wireless setting, 5-5
HW Setup, 1-13
accessing, 7-1
Boot priority, 7-3
CPU, 7-7
device config, 7-8
display, 7-2
general, 7-2
keyboard, 7-6
LAN, 7-7
Parallel/Printer, 7-8
USB, 7-8
window, 7-1
I
i.LINK, 1-8, 2-6, 8-13
connecting, 8-14
disconnecting, 8-14
precautions, 8-13
problems, 9-18
Indicators, 2-12, 6-2
K
Keyboard, 1-7, 5-1
emulating enhanced keyboard, 5-2
Fn Sticky key, 5-6
Function keys F1...F12, 5-2
Hot keys, 5-3
problems, 9-7
typewriter keys, 5-1
Windows special keys, 5-7
Keypad overlay, 1-11, 5-7
Arrow mode, 5-7
User’s Manual
Index
Numeric mode, 5-8
temporarily using normal
keyboard (overlay
on), 5-8
temporarily using overlay
(overlay off), 5-8
turning on the overlays, 5-7
L
LAN, 1-9, 4-34
cable types, 4-34
connecting, 4-34
disconnecting, 4-35
jack, 2-5
LAN active indicator, 2-6
Link indicator, 2-5
problems, 9-20
M
Media care, 4-25
CD/DVDs, 4-25
floppy disks, 4-25
SD card, 8-5
Memory, 1-3
expansion, 1-17, 8-6
problems, 9-17
Modem, 1-9, 4-27
connecting, 4-28
disconnecting, 4-30
jack, 2-5
problems, 9-19
properties menu, 4-28
region selection, 4-27
Moving the computer, 4-36
P
Password
power on, 1-12
problems, 9-7
starting the computer by,
6-15
Supervisor, 6-15
user, 6-13
PC card, 1-8, 8-2
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
inserting, 8-2
location of slot, 2-3
removing, 8-3
Ports
Docking, 1-8
external monitor, 1-7
i.LINK, 1-8
Serial, 1-7
USB, 1-8
Power
button location, 2-9
conditions, 6-1
hibernation mode, 3-8
indicators, 6-2
panel on/off, 1-12, 6-16
shut down mode (boot
mode), 3-6
standby mode, 3-6
system auto off, 6-16
turning off, 3-6
turning on, 3-5
Printer
parallel, 7-8
Problems
AC power, 9-5
AccuPoint, 9-14
Analyzing symptoms, 9-2
Battery, 9-5
Bluetooth, 9-20
Dual Pointing Device, 9-14
DVD Super Multi drive, 9-12
DVD-ROM&CD-R/RW
drive, 9-11
ExpressCard, 9-14
External monitor, 9-18
Fingerprint sensor, 9-16
Hard disk drive, 9-8
Hardware and system
checklist, 9-3
i.LINK, 9-18
Internal LCD display panel,
9-8
Keyboard, 9-7
Index-3
Index
LAN, 9-20
Memory expansion, 9-17
Modem, 9-19
Overheating power down,
9-4
Password, 9-7
PC card, 9-14
Power, 9-4
Real Time Clock, 9-7
SD card, 9-13
Self test, 9-4
Sound system, 9-17
System start-up, 9-3
TOSHIBA support, 9-23
Touch Pad/AccuPoint, 9-14
TV output signal, 9-21
USB, 9-16
USB floppy disk drive, 9-13
USB mouse, 9-15
Wireless LAN, 9-20
Processor, 1-3
R
RecordNow!, 1-15, 4-20
Recovery HDD, 3-10
Recovery Media, 3-11
Restarting the computer, 3-9
S
SD card, 1-8
care, 8-5
formatting, 8-4
inserting, 8-4
problems, 9-13
removing, 8-4
Security lock, 1-17
attaching, 8-17
Slim Select Bay, 1-11
changing modules, 4-11
Soft keys
enhanced keyboard, 5-2
Enter, 5-3
right Ctrl key, 5-3
Downloaded
Index-4
from LpManual.com Manuals
ScrLock, 5-3
Sound system, 4-26
headphone jack, 1-8, 2-2
microphone jack, 1-8, 2-2
mute hot keys, 5-3
problems, 9-17
Stereo speakers, 2-10
volume control, 2-2
Standby, 1-13
setting, 3-6
System automatic, 1-11
T
TOSHIBA Assist, 1-15
TOSHIBA Assist button, 1-11
TOSHIBA ConfigFree, 1-15
TOSHIBA Controls, 1-13
TOSHIBA Dual Pointing Device
utility, 1-16
TOSHIBA Mobile Extension,
1-15
TOSHIBA PC Diagnostic Tool,
1-15
TOSHIBA Power Saver, 1-13
TOSHIBA Presentation button,
1-11
TOSHIBA SD Memory Boot Utility, 1-15
TOSHIBA Zooming Utility, 1-15
TV, 8-11
U
USB, 1-8
location, 2-4
problems, 9-16
USB floppy disk drive, 1-5
problems, 9-13
using, 4-10
V
Video modes, B-1
Video RAM, 1-3
Volume control, 2-2
User’s Manual
Index
W
Wireless communication, 4-30
indicator, 2-12, 4-33
Wireless communication switch,
1-10, 2-2, 4-33
Wireless LAN, 1-10, 4-30
problems, 9-20
Downloaded
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Index-5
Index
Downloaded
Index-6
from LpManual.com Manuals
User’s Manual
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement